US20090216066A1 - Magnetically assisted medication delivery method - Google Patents
Magnetically assisted medication delivery method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20090216066A1 US20090216066A1 US12/431,835 US43183509A US2009216066A1 US 20090216066 A1 US20090216066 A1 US 20090216066A1 US 43183509 A US43183509 A US 43183509A US 2009216066 A1 US2009216066 A1 US 2009216066A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- patient
- guide rod
- leading end
- end portion
- tracheal tube
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M16/00—Devices for influencing the respiratory system of patients by gas treatment, e.g. mouth-to-mouth respiration; Tracheal tubes
- A61M16/04—Tracheal tubes
- A61M16/0488—Mouthpieces; Means for guiding, securing or introducing the tubes
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/00064—Constructional details of the endoscope body
- A61B1/00071—Insertion part of the endoscope body
- A61B1/0008—Insertion part of the endoscope body characterised by distal tip features
- A61B1/00082—Balloons
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/00112—Connection or coupling means
- A61B1/00121—Connectors, fasteners and adapters, e.g. on the endoscope handle
- A61B1/00124—Connectors, fasteners and adapters, e.g. on the endoscope handle electrical, e.g. electrical plug-and-socket connection
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/005—Flexible endoscopes
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/012—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor characterised by internal passages or accessories therefor
- A61B1/015—Control of fluid supply or evacuation
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/06—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor with illuminating arrangements
- A61B1/0661—Endoscope light sources
- A61B1/0676—Endoscope light sources at distal tip of an endoscope
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/06—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor with illuminating arrangements
- A61B1/0661—Endoscope light sources
- A61B1/0684—Endoscope light sources using light emitting diodes [LED]
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/06—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor with illuminating arrangements
- A61B1/07—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor with illuminating arrangements using light-conductive means, e.g. optical fibres
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B5/00—Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
- A61B5/06—Devices, other than using radiation, for detecting or locating foreign bodies ; determining position of probes within or on the body of the patient
- A61B5/065—Determining position of the probe employing exclusively positioning means located on or in the probe, e.g. using position sensors arranged on the probe
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B8/00—Diagnosis using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves
- A61B8/08—Detecting organic movements or changes, e.g. tumours, cysts, swellings
- A61B8/0833—Detecting organic movements or changes, e.g. tumours, cysts, swellings involving detecting or locating foreign bodies or organic structures
- A61B8/0841—Detecting organic movements or changes, e.g. tumours, cysts, swellings involving detecting or locating foreign bodies or organic structures for locating instruments
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B8/00—Diagnosis using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves
- A61B8/12—Diagnosis using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves in body cavities or body tracts, e.g. by using catheters
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B8/00—Diagnosis using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves
- A61B8/42—Details of probe positioning or probe attachment to the patient
- A61B8/4245—Details of probe positioning or probe attachment to the patient involving determining the position of the probe, e.g. with respect to an external reference frame or to the patient
- A61B8/4254—Details of probe positioning or probe attachment to the patient involving determining the position of the probe, e.g. with respect to an external reference frame or to the patient using sensors mounted on the probe
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B8/00—Diagnosis using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves
- A61B8/42—Details of probe positioning or probe attachment to the patient
- A61B8/4245—Details of probe positioning or probe attachment to the patient involving determining the position of the probe, e.g. with respect to an external reference frame or to the patient
- A61B8/4263—Details of probe positioning or probe attachment to the patient involving determining the position of the probe, e.g. with respect to an external reference frame or to the patient using sensors not mounted on the probe, e.g. mounted on an external reference frame
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B8/00—Diagnosis using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves
- A61B8/44—Constructional features of the ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic diagnostic device
- A61B8/4444—Constructional features of the ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic diagnostic device related to the probe
- A61B8/445—Details of catheter construction
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B8/00—Diagnosis using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves
- A61B8/46—Ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic diagnostic devices with special arrangements for interfacing with the operator or the patient
- A61B8/461—Displaying means of special interest
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M16/00—Devices for influencing the respiratory system of patients by gas treatment, e.g. mouth-to-mouth respiration; Tracheal tubes
- A61M16/04—Tracheal tubes
- A61M16/0402—Special features for tracheal tubes not otherwise provided for
- A61M16/0411—Special features for tracheal tubes not otherwise provided for with means for differentiating between oesophageal and tracheal intubation
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M16/00—Devices for influencing the respiratory system of patients by gas treatment, e.g. mouth-to-mouth respiration; Tracheal tubes
- A61M16/04—Tracheal tubes
- A61M16/0434—Cuffs
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M16/00—Devices for influencing the respiratory system of patients by gas treatment, e.g. mouth-to-mouth respiration; Tracheal tubes
- A61M16/04—Tracheal tubes
- A61M16/0488—Mouthpieces; Means for guiding, securing or introducing the tubes
- A61M16/049—Mouthpieces
- A61M16/0495—Mouthpieces with tongue depressors
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M16/00—Devices for influencing the respiratory system of patients by gas treatment, e.g. mouth-to-mouth respiration; Tracheal tubes
- A61M16/04—Tracheal tubes
- A61M16/0488—Mouthpieces; Means for guiding, securing or introducing the tubes
- A61M16/0497—Tube stabilizer
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M25/00—Catheters; Hollow probes
- A61M25/01—Introducing, guiding, advancing, emplacing or holding catheters
- A61M25/0102—Insertion or introduction using an inner stiffening member, e.g. stylet or push-rod
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M25/00—Catheters; Hollow probes
- A61M25/01—Introducing, guiding, advancing, emplacing or holding catheters
- A61M25/0105—Steering means as part of the catheter or advancing means; Markers for positioning
- A61M25/0108—Steering means as part of the catheter or advancing means; Markers for positioning using radio-opaque or ultrasound markers
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M25/00—Catheters; Hollow probes
- A61M25/01—Introducing, guiding, advancing, emplacing or holding catheters
- A61M25/09—Guide wires
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M25/00—Catheters; Hollow probes
- A61M2025/0008—Catheters; Hollow probes having visible markings on its surface, i.e. visible to the naked eye, for any purpose, e.g. insertion depth markers, rotational markers or identification of type
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M25/00—Catheters; Hollow probes
- A61M25/01—Introducing, guiding, advancing, emplacing or holding catheters
- A61M25/02—Holding devices, e.g. on the body
- A61M2025/0213—Holding devices, e.g. on the body where the catheter is attached by means specifically adapted to a part of the human body
- A61M2025/022—Holding devices, e.g. on the body where the catheter is attached by means specifically adapted to a part of the human body specifically adapted for the mouth
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M25/00—Catheters; Hollow probes
- A61M25/01—Introducing, guiding, advancing, emplacing or holding catheters
- A61M25/09—Guide wires
- A61M2025/09008—Guide wires having a balloon
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M25/00—Catheters; Hollow probes
- A61M25/01—Introducing, guiding, advancing, emplacing or holding catheters
- A61M25/09—Guide wires
- A61M2025/091—Guide wires having a lumen for drug delivery or suction
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M2205/00—General characteristics of the apparatus
- A61M2205/02—General characteristics of the apparatus characterised by a particular materials
- A61M2205/0272—Electro-active or magneto-active materials
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61M—DEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
- A61M2205/00—General characteristics of the apparatus
- A61M2205/58—Means for facilitating use, e.g. by people with impaired vision
- A61M2205/587—Lighting arrangements
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a new and improved method and apparatus for use in tracheal intubination or other medical procedures
- Tracheal intubination has previously been utilized to provide an unobstructed air passage to a patient's lungs. Tracheal intubination is frequently done under emergency circumstances which are not optimal. It has previously been recognized that is necessary to have a tracheal tube bend around the patient's epiglottis and move from the patient's pharynx into the larynx at the upper end of the patient's trachea rather than into the patient's esophagus. However, it is difficult for a person inserting the tracheal tube to know where the leading end portion of the tracheal tube is located relative to the patient's larynx.
- An improved method and apparatus for use in tracheal intubination or other medical procedure may include a positioning apparatus.
- the positioning apparatus When the positioning apparatus is used for tracheal intubination, the positioning apparatus is located relative to a patient's trachea by engaging a portion of the patient's body, such as the Adam's apple.
- a flexible guide rod may be moved relative to the positioning apparatus until a leading end portion of the guide rod has moved into the patient's trachea.
- a tracheal tube is slid along the guide rod into the patient's trachea.
- the guide rod may be moved through either a tubular guide member or a tracheal tube which extends through the patient's mouth into the patient's pharynx.
- the distance which the guide rod is to be moved may advantageously determined. This may be done as a function of spacing between locations on the positioning apparatus. If desired, indicia may be provided on the positioning apparatus and cooperating indicia may be provided on the guide rod.
- a magnet may be utilized to attract a leading end portion of the guide rod.
- the magnet is disposed outside of the patient's body and may be positioned adjacent to an anterior side of the trachea. Magnetic attraction between the magnet and the leading end portion of the guide rod deflects the guide rod. This steers the leading end portion of the guide rod into the entrance to the patient's trachea.
- a magnet may be used to steer a member relative to a patient's body tissue during performance of operations other than tracheal intubination.
- an image of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube may be transmitted to a location outside of the patient's body. Movement of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube into the patient's trachea is interrupted when the image transmitted from the leading end portion of the guide rod or tracheal tube indicates that the leading end portion of the guide rod or tracheal tube has been moved to a desired position relative to the patient's trachea.
- transmission of an image of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube may advantageously be performed when the tracheal tube is utilized without benefit of the positioning apparatus.
- the transmission of an image of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube may be performed when the positioning apparatus is used in association with the tracheal tube.
- Positioning of the guide rod relative to the patient's trachea may also be facilitated by the transmitting of images of body tissue adjacent to a leading end portion of the guide rod.
- Detectors and emitters may be utilized to detect the position of the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or the tracheal tube relative to the patient's trachea.
- an emitter such as a magnet or a light source
- One or more detectors may be provided on the outside of the patient's neck to detect the output from the emitter when the guide rod and/or the tracheal tube are in a desired position relative to the patient's trachea.
- a detector may be connected with the leading end portion of a guide rod and/or tracheal tube and one or more emitters positioned relative to the outside of the patient's neck. The detector would provide an output indicating when the guide rod and/or tracheal tube is moved to a desired position relative to the patient's trachea.
- force may be applied against the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube to steer the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube.
- the application of force against the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube may be accomplished by expanding an expandable element connected with the guide rod and/or the tracheal tube.
- FIG. 1 is a fragmentary schematic illustration depicting the use of a positioning apparatus to position a guide rod relative to the mouth and trachea of a patient;
- FIG. 2 a fragmentary schematic illustration depicting the manner in which a tracheal tube is moved along the guide rod of FIG. 1 into the trachea of the patient;
- FIG. 3 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, similar to FIG. 1 , illustrating the manner in which a laryngoscope may be combined with the positioning apparatus;
- FIG. 4 is a fragmentary schematic illustration depicting the use of another embodiment of the positioning apparatus to position a guide rod relative to the mouth and trachea of a patient;
- FIG. 5 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of a portion of the apparatus of FIG. 4 and illustrating the relationship between a guide rod and a guide tube;
- FIG. 6 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of a portion of the apparatus of FIG. 4 and illustrating the relationship between the guide tube, guide rod, and a guide member in the positioning apparatus;
- FIG. 7 is a schematic fragmentary sectional view illustrating a manner in which the positioning apparatus engages a patient's Adam's apple and the manner in which a magnet is moved along the outside of the neck of the patient;
- FIG. 8 (on sheet 3 of the drawings) is an enlarged fragmentary schematic illustration of indicia on a portion of the guide rod of FIG. 4 ;
- FIG. 9 is a fragmentary schematic illustration of the guide rod with the positioning apparatus and guide tube of FIG. 4 removed after positioning of the guide rod relative to the patient's trachea;
- FIG. 10 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, generally similar to FIG. 9 , illustrating the manner in which a tracheal tube is moved along the guide rod into the patient's trachea;
- FIG. 11 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, generally similar to FIG. 4 , illustrating an embodiment of the apparatus in which the tracheal tube is used to guide movement of the guide rod;
- FIG. 12 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, similar to FIG. 1 , illustrating an embodiment of the positioning apparatus which transmits an image of body tissue adjacent to a leading end portion of the guide rod;
- FIG. 13 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, generally similar to FIGS. 1 and 12 , of an embodiment of the invention in which a detector on a leading end portion of a guide rod detects emitters disposed on the neck of the patient;
- FIG. 14 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, depicting the manner in which a plurality of emitters are arranged in an array around the Adams's apple of the patient of FIG. 13 ;
- FIG. 15 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, generally similar to FIG. 13 , of an embodiment of the invention in which detectors on the neck of the patient detect an emitter on a leading end portion of the guide rod;
- FIG. 16 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, generally similar to FIG. 14 , illustrating a manner in which a plurality of detectors are positioned in an array around the Adam's apple on the neck of the patient of FIG. 15 ;
- FIG. 17 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of the leading end portion of a guide rod on which a detector and a plurality of expandable steering elements are disposed;
- FIG. 18 is a plan view, taken generally along the line 18 - 18 of FIG. 17 , further illustrating the relationship of the expandable steering elements to the leading end portion of the guide rod;
- FIG. 19 is a schematic fragmentary sectional view of a leading end portion of a guide rod on which an emitter and a plurality of expandable steering elements are disposed;
- FIG. 20 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of a leading end portion of a tracheal tube and illustrating the manner in which a light source and light conductor are disposed on the tracheal tube to facilitate visualization of tissue disposed adjacent to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube;
- FIG. 21 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of a leading end portion of a tracheal tube and illustrating a plurality of detectors which are disposed on the leading end portion of tracheal tube;
- FIG. 22 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of a leading end portion of a tracheal tube illustrating the manner in which a plurality of emitters and expandable steering elements are mounted on the leading end portion of the tracheal tube;
- FIG. 23 is a schematic illustration depicting the positioning apparatus of FIGS. 1 and 2 ;
- FIG. 24 is a schematic illustration, generally similar to FIG. 23 , illustrating another embodiment of the apparatus of FIGS. 1 and 2 ;
- FIG. 25 is a fragmentary schematic illustration of a portion of a positioning apparatus having another embodiment of the positioning section
- FIG. 26 is a fragmentary schematic illustration depicting the relationship between the positioning section of FIG. 25 and a patient's Adam's apple during use of the positioning apparatus;
- FIG. 27 is a fragmentary schematic illustration of a portion of a positioning apparatus having another embodiment of the positioning section.
- FIG. 28 is a fragmentary schematic illustration depicting the relationship between the positioning section of FIG. 27 and a patient's Adam's apple during use of the positioning apparatus.
- the present invention relates to a new and improved method and apparatus for use in tracheal intubination or other medical procedures.
- a portion of a patient's head 10 and respiratory system 11 has been illustrated schematically in FIG. 1 .
- the schematicized illustration of the patient's head 10 and respiratory system 11 includes a mouth 12 which is connected with a throat 14 in a neck 16 of the patient.
- a pharynx extends downward from a nasal cavity in the head 10 of the patient.
- the pharynx is connected with an esophagus 26 and a trachea 28 in the neck 16 of the patient.
- the esophagus 26 extends from the pharynx to the stomach of the patient.
- the trachea 28 extends from the pharynx to the bronchial tubes and lungs of the patient.
- the trachea 28 ( FIG. 1 ) has an upper end portion 30 which is referred to as the larynx.
- Vocal cords or folds 32 have been indicated schematically in FIG. 1 and are disposed in the larynx 30 .
- the vocal cords 32 are adjacent to the Adam's apple 34 of the patient.
- the Adam's apple 34 is a laryngeal prominence formed by lamina of cartilage in the larynx.
- Opening of a passage for air from the patient's mouth to the patient's lungs may require insertion of a flexible tracheal tube 38 ( FIG. 2 ). Movement of the flexible tracheal tube 38 from the patient's mouth 12 into the pharynx of the patient is relatively easily accomplished. However, directing the tracheal tube 38 into the patient's trachea 28 may present difficulties. This is because the tracheal tube must extend past the epiglottis into the larynx 30 at the upper end of the trachea 28 . The tracheal tube 38 must not enter the esophagus 26 rather than the trachea 28 .
- the tracheal tube 38 During movement of the leading end of the tracheal tube 38 through the larynx 30 , it is desirable to have the tracheal tube near the central portion of the laryngeal cavity in order to minimize irritation of the vocal folds or cords 32 by the tracheal tube.
- a flexible guide wire or rod 50 ( FIG. 1 ) is utilized to guide movement of the flexible tracheal tube 38 ( FIG. 2 ) into the trachea 28 .
- the flexible guide rod 50 has a soft generally spherical leading end portion 52 .
- the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod 50 is formed of a resiliently compressible material which is readily deflected by engagement with the vocal cords or folds 32 and by engagement with the surface of the trachea 28 .
- the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod 50 may be coated with a suitable lubricant to facilitate movement of the leading end portion between the vocal cords with minimum of irritation.
- the guide wire 50 is initially positioned relative to the patient's trachea 28 with a positioning apparatus 56 ( FIG. 1 ).
- the positioning apparatus 56 engages the patient's Adam's apple 34 to locate the positioning apparatus relative to the trachea 28 of the patient.
- the positioning apparatus 56 provides a measurement which is a function of the distance between the Adam's apple 34 and the mouth 12 of the patient. This measurement is utilized to determine the distance through which the guide rod 50 is to be moved relative to the positioning apparatus 56 as the guide rod is inserted into the trachea 28 .
- the positioning apparatus 56 has been and will be described herein in association with tracheal intubination. However, it is contemplated that the positioning apparatus 56 will be used in association with many other medical procedures where accurate positioning of an object relative to body tissue is desired.
- the positioning apparatus may be used in association with endoscopic, arthroscopic or fiber optic surgical procedures. It is believed that the positioning apparatus 56 will be used in conjunction with medical procedures where it is necessary to position an object at a location in a patient's body where there is only limited access.
- the positioning apparatus 56 positions the guide rod 50 relative to the patient's trachea 28 during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea.
- the positioning apparatus 56 provides an indication of the distance which the guide rod is to be moved into the patient's trachea. By using the positioning apparatus 56 , a person moving the guide rod 50 into the patient's trachea 28 can know where the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod is located relative to the trachea.
- the flexible guide rod 50 may be formed of either polymeric material or metal.
- the illustrated polymeric guide rod 50 has a relatively small diameter and is readily deflected.
- the guide rod 50 has a circular cross sectional configuration.
- the guide rod 50 is axially movable relative to the positioning apparatus 56 under the influence of force manually applied to the portion of the guide rod disposed to the left (as viewed in FIG. 1 ) of the positioning apparatus 56 . This force results in axial movement of the guide rod 50 relative to the positioning apparatus 56 .
- the leading end 52 of the guide rod 50 may deflect body tissue to clear a passage for the guide rod 50 .
- the guide rod 50 As the guide rod 50 is moved axially relative to the positioning apparatus 56 , the guide rod may be resiliently deflected by engagement with the body tissue of the patient. As the guide rod 50 is manually pushed toward the right (as viewed in FIG. 1 ), the leading end 52 of the guide rod moves toward the larynx 30 .
- the positioning apparatus 56 is used to locate the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod 50 as the guide rod moves toward the larynx 30 .
- the positioning apparatus 56 includes a base section 78 and an arcuate upper section 80 ( FIG. 1 ).
- the base section 78 engages the patient's Adam's apple 34 to locate the positioning apparatus 56 relative to the patient's trachea 28 .
- the upper section 80 of the positioning apparatus 56 guides movement of the guide rod 50 during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea 28 .
- the base section 78 and upper section 80 of the positioning apparatus 56 cooperate to provide a measurement of the distance between the patient's mouth 12 and the patient's Adam's apple 34 .
- This distance will vary from patient to patient depending upon the size of the patient, the specific configuration of the head 10 of the patient, and other factors.
- the distance which the guide rod 50 must be moved axially into the patient's larynx 30 will vary as a function of variations in the distance between the patient's mouth 12 and the patient's Adam's apple 34 . This is because the patient's Adam's apple 34 is located adjacent to the entrance to the trachea 28 .
- the positioning apparatus 56 can be used to position many different objects at desired locations in a patient's body.
- the guide rod 50 or a similar member could be inserted into a patient's stomach or colon.
- the base section 78 of the positioning apparatus would be positioned in engagement with an exterior surface on the patient's body at a location where the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod 50 is to be moved.
- the upper section 80 of the positioning apparatus 56 would cooperate with the base section 78 and guide rod 50 to provide a clear indication of the location of the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod 50 relative to the patient's body tissue, for example, the patient's stomach or colon.
- the base section 78 ( FIG. 1 ) of the positioning apparatus 56 includes a tubular cylindrical body section 86 .
- the base section 78 also includes a positioning section 96 which engages the patient's Adam's apple 34 and is supported by the body section 86 .
- the positioning section 96 engages the patient's Adam's apple 34 .
- the illustrated positioning section 96 FIG. 1
- the positioning section could be constructed so as to engage a plurality of locations on the patient's neck.
- the positioning section 96 could have many different constructions. It is believed that it may be particularly advantageous to utilize a positioning section 96 having the construction illustrated in FIGS. 25 and 26 herein. Alternatively, the positioning section 96 may have the construction illustrated in FIGS. 27 and 28 or FIGS. 4 and 7 herein if desired.
- the patient's trachea 28 may have a slight anterior bend when the patient's head 10 is in the position illustrated in FIG. 1 . This slight bend can be eliminated by the manual application of minimal force to the positioning section 96 . This force presses the positioning section 96 against the patient's neck.
- the patient's Adam's apple 34 could be used to locate the positioning apparatus 56 relative to the patient's trachea 28 .
- a different portion of the patient's body could be used to locate the positioning apparatus relative to the patient's trachea.
- the patient's shoulders could be used.
- bones in the patient's neck 16 could be used to locate the positioning apparatus 56 relative to the patient's trachea 28 .
- the arcuate upper section 80 of the positioning apparatus 56 includes an arcuate member 108 which is slidably connected with the body section 86 at a connection 110 .
- the connection 110 is movable axially along the cylindrical body section 86 .
- the body section 86 is movable transversely to the arcuate member 108 , in the manner indicated by the arrows 112 in FIG. 1 .
- Suitable indicia indicated by lines in FIG. 1 , may be provided on the arcuate member 108 to indicate the position of the connection 110 relative to the arcuate member.
- the connection 110 may include a plurality of set screws (not shown) having manually engagable flanges or arms. One of the set screws may be tightened to prevent movement between the body section 86 and the connection 110 . Another set screw may be tightened to prevent movement between the arcuate member 108 and the connection 110 .
- connection 110 When the connection 110 has been moved to a desired location along the body section 86 , a set screw in the connection is tightened to hold the arcuate member 108 against axial movement along to the cylindrical body section 86 .
- the arcuate member 108 is then moved transversely to the body section 86 , that is, in the direction of the arrows 112 , to position a guide section 114 in alignment with the patient's mouth 12 and trachea 28 .
- another set screw in the connection 110 is tightened to hold the arcuate member 108 against transverse movement relative to the body section 86 .
- the guide rod 50 extends through a cylindrical passage in the guide section 114 . Therefore, transverse movement of the arcuate member 108 relative to the body section 86 , that is, in the direction indicated by the arrows 112 positions the guide rod 50 in alignment with the patient's mouth 12 .
- the guide rod 50 is axially movable relative to the guide section 114 into the patient's mouth 12 and trachea 28 .
- the distance between the patient's Adam's apple 34 and the arcuate member 108 is indicated by indicia 124 ( FIG. 1 ).
- the indicia 124 is disposed on the cylindrical body section 86 of the positioning apparatus 56 .
- the position of the connection 110 relative to the indicia 124 indicates the distance which the arcuate member is spaced from the positioning section 96 .
- the distance which the connection 110 is spaced from the positioning section 96 is a function of the distance between the patient's Adam's apple 34 and the entrance to the patient's mouth 12 .
- the indicia 124 is formed by a plurality of colored bands 130 .
- Each of the bands 130 has a different color from the other bands.
- Each of the bands 130 has the same axial extent.
- the bands could have different axial extents if desired.
- numerical indicia could be provided. However, it is believed that it may be easier to read the different colored bands 130 than to read numerical indicia.
- Colored bands 142 are provided on the guide rod 50 .
- the colored bands 142 have different colors which correspond to the colors of the bands 130 on the cylindrical body section 86 of the positioning apparatus 56 .
- the colored bands 142 on the guide rod 50 are spaced from the end portion 52 of the guide rod by the same distance which correspondingly colored bands 130 on the body section 86 are spaced from the center of the Adam's apple 34 .
- the bands 142 on the guide rod 50 cooperate with an end portion 156 ( FIG. 1 ) of the guide section 114 to indicate when the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod is in a desired position relative to the patient's trachea 28 .
- the red band on the guide rod 50 will be moved to a position in which it is adjacent to the guide section 114 .
- the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod will have moved through a desired distance into the patient's trachea 28 and will be aligned with the patient's Adam's apple 34 .
- the indicia 124 would be revised to correspond to the distance which the guide rod 50 is to be moved relative to the arcuate member 108 to bring the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod into alignment with the positioning section 96 or to a position spaced a desired distance from the positioning section. It is contemplated that the positioning apparatus 56 maybe used during endoscopic, arthroscopic, or fiber optic surgery at many locations in a patient's body, for example during surgery on joints in the patient's body.
- the positioning apparatus 56 may be used in association with the delivery of medicants to relatively inaccessible locations in a patient's body.
- a medicant could be connected with the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod 50 and released when the indicia 124 indicated that the medicant has been moved to a desired position relative to the positioning section 96 .
- the medicant may be released by activating a holder, disposed at the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod.
- a Bowden cable or other actuator may extend through the guide rod to the medicant holder to operate the medicant holder from a closed condition to an open condition to release the medicant.
- the positioning apparatus 56 is separated from the guide rod 50 while the guide rod remains stationary relative to the patient's trachea.
- the indicia 142 on the guide rod 50 indicates that the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod has been moved through a desired distance into the patient's trachea 28
- axial movement of the guide rod 50 is interrupted.
- one of the colored bands 142 on the guide rod 50 corresponding to the one of the colored bands 130 aligned with the connection 110 is aligned with the end surface 156 on the guide section 114
- the guide section 114 is then slid axially outward, that is toward the left as viewed in FIG. 1 , along the guide rod 50 .
- the guide rod is manually held against movement relative to the patient's mouth 12 and trachea 28 .
- the upper section 80 and base section 78 are separated from the patient during movement of the guide section 114 along the guide rod 50 . As this occurs, the guide rod 50 is stationary relative to the patient.
- the tracheal tube 38 ( FIG. 2 ) is slid along the guide rod 50 into the patient's trachea 28 .
- the end of the guide rod 50 remote from the patient's mouth 12 and trachea 28 is inserted into the tracheal tube 38 .
- the guide rod 50 is manually held against movement relative to the patient's mouth 12 and trachea 28 .
- the tracheal tube 38 is then moved axially along the guide rod 50 while the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod remains stationary in the patient's trachea.
- the guide rod directs the leading end portion of the tracheal tube into the patient's larynx 30 and past the vocal cords 32 .
- the leading end of the tracheal tube 38 is centered in the space between the vocal cords and the entrance to the patient's trachea by the guide rod 50 . This minimizes irritation of the patient's vocal cords 32 .
- the tracheal tube 38 is moved along the guide rod 50 at least until the leading end of the tracheal tube engages the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod 50 .
- the tracheal tube 38 may be moved further into the patient's trachea 28 than the distance which the guide rod 50 is moved into the patient's trachea. If this is the case, the tracheal tube 38 is pushed axially along the guide rod 50 past the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod. As this occurs, the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod 50 is compressed slightly and enters the tracheal tube 38 .
- the guide rod 50 is removed from the tracheal tube ( FIG. 7 ).
- the tracheal tube 38 then provides a passage for the conduction air, other gases, and/or medication to the patient's lungs
- a laryngoscope 170 ( FIG. 3 ) maybe connected with the connection 110 which interconnects the body section 86 and arcuate upper section 80 of the positioning apparatus 56 .
- the laryngoscope 170 and body section 86 are moveable relative to each other to enable the laryngoscope to be positioned in the patient's mouth 12 .
- the laryngoscope 170 As the laryngoscope 170 is inserted into the patient's mouth 12 , the laryngoscope engages the patient's tongue. The laryngoscope then holds the patients tongue in a desired position in the mouth 12 of the patient.
- the laryngoscope 170 is then inserted further into the patient's mouth 12 to expose progressively deeper structures within the oropharynx.
- the laryngoscope 170 could be advanced to facilitate visualization of the glottic opening in a known manner.
- the laryngoscope may be provided as part of the positioning apparatus 56 , in the manner illustrated in FIG. 3 , it is contemplated that the laryngoscope 170 could be separate from the positioning apparatus if desired. Regardless of whether the laryngoscope 170 is formed as part of the positioning apparatus 56 or separate from the positioning apparatus, the laryngoscope is utilized in a known manner in management of the patient's tongue and airway.
- FIGS. 4 through 10 A second embodiment of the invention is illustrated in FIGS. 4 through 10 . Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 4-10 is generally similar to embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 1-3 , similar terminology will be utilized to refer to similar components.
- FIG. 4 A portion of a patient's head 210 has been illustrated schematically in FIG. 4 .
- the patient's head includes a mouth 212 which is connected with a throat 214 and a neck 216 of the patient.
- the patient's head 210 has been schematically illustrated in an upright orientation in FIG. 4 , it should be understood that the patient's head could be in a different orientation if desired.
- the patient's head 210 could be in the orientation illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 for the patient's head 10 .
- a pharynx 220 extends downward from a nasal cavity 222 in the head 210 of the patient.
- the pharynx 220 is connected with an esophagus 226 and a trachea 228 in the neck 216 of the patient.
- the esophagus 226 extends from the pharynx 220 to the stomach of the patient.
- the trachea 228 extends from the pharynx to the bronchial tubes and lungs of the patient.
- the trachea 228 ( FIG. 4 ) has an upper end portion 230 which is referred to as the larynx.
- Vocal cords or folds 232 have been indicated schematically in FIG. 3 and are disposed in the larynx 230 .
- the vocal cords 232 are adjacent to the Adam's apple 234 of the patient.
- the Adam's apple 234 is a laryngeal prominence formed by lamina of cartilage in the larynx.
- Opening of a passage for air from the patient's mouth to the patient's lungs may require insertion of a flexible tracheal tube 238 ( FIG. 10 ). Movement of the flexible tracheal tube 238 from the patient's mouth 212 into the pharynx 220 of the patient is relatively easily accomplished. However, directing the tracheal tube 238 into the patient's trachea 228 may present difficulties. This is because an anterior bend 240 must be formed in the tracheal tube 238 . The anterior bend 240 extends around the epiglottis 242 into the larynx 230 at the upper end of the trachea 228 . The anterior bend 240 can be minimized by placing the patient in the orientation illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 .
- a flexible guide wire or rod 250 ( FIGS. 4 and 9 ) is utilized to guide movement of the flexible tracheal tube 238 ( FIGS. 9 and 10 ) into the trachea 228 .
- the flexible guide rod 250 ( FIG. 9 ) has a soft generally spherical leading end portion 252 .
- the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 is formed of a resiliently compressible material which is readily deflected by engagement with the vocal cords or folds 232 and by engagement with the surface of the trachea 228 . If desired, the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 may be coated with a suitable lubricant to facilitate movement of the leading end portion between the vocal cords with minimum of irritation.
- the guide wire 250 is initially positioned relative to the patient's trachea 228 with a positioning apparatus 256 ( FIG. 4 ).
- the positioning apparatus 256 engages the patient's Adam's apple 234 to locate the positioning apparatus relative to the trachea 228 of the patient.
- the positioning apparatus 256 provides a measurement which is a function of the distance between the Adam's apple 234 and the mouth 212 of the patient. This measurement is utilized to determine the distance through which the guide rod 250 is to be moved relative to the positioning apparatus 256 as the guide rod is inserted into the trachea 228 .
- a magnet 260 ( FIG. 4 ) is utilized to attract the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 and to steer the leading end portion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea 228 .
- the magnet 260 is a permanent magnet formed of a strongly magnetizable material such as cobalt and neodymium.
- a strongly magnetizable material such as cobalt and neodymium.
- other known magnetizable materials having high saturation magnetization values such as cerium, praseodymium, and/or samarium with cobalt and/or other materials, could be used.
- the magnet 260 may be an electromagnet
- the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 contains ferrite particles.
- the ferrite particles may or may not be magnetized. Or course, other known magnetizable or magnetic particles could be utilized.
- the polarity of the leading end of the magnet on the guide rod is opposite from the polarity of the magnet 260 .
- the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod enters the field of the magnet 260 .
- the field of the magnet 260 has sufficient strength to cause the guide rod 250 to deflect slightly toward the right (as viewed in FIG. 4 ).
- the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod moves into the larynx 230 at a location adjacent to the center of the larynx. This enables the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 to move between the vocal cords or folds 232 with a minimum of irritation to the vocal cords.
- the magnet 260 is described herein as steering the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 into the trachea, it is contemplated that the magnet could be utilized to steer members at many different locations in a patient's body.
- the magnet 260 may be an electromagnet. If the magnet 260 is an electromagnet, the magnet may be turned on and off, that is, energized and de-energized during steering of the leading end portion 252 of the guide 250 . If desired, the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 could also be formed by an electromagnet. If this was done, conductors for connecting the leading end portion 252 of the guide 250 would extend along the inside of the guide rod. By reversing the direction of current flow to either the electromagnet forming the magnet 260 or the electromagnet forming the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 , the two electromagnets could be made to sequentially attract and repel each other.
- the magnet 360 may be moved up and down along the patient's neck.
- the magnet 360 may also be moved sidewards relative to the patient's neck. By moving the magnet 360 relative to the patient's neck, a magnetic field emanating from the magnet is effective to pull the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 in the desired direction.
- magnet 260 Although the use of the magnet 260 has been disclosed herein in association with the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 4-10 , it is contemplated that the magnet 260 could be used in association with other embodiments of the invention. For example, the magnet 260 could be used with the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 .
- the magnet 260 may be used to steer devices other than the guide rod 250 .
- the magnet 260 FIG. 4
- a positioning apparatus similar to the positioning apparatus 56 of FIG. 1 or the positioning apparatus 256 of FIG. 4
- a magnet similar to the magnet 260 may be used during endoscopic, arthroscopic, or fiber optic surgery at many different locations in a patient's body.
- the magnet 260 may be used to steer a guide rod being positioned relative to a joint by a positioning apparatus, similar to the positioning apparatus 56 of FIG.
- the magnet 260 may also be used to position medicants at desired locations in the patient's body. Although it is believed that the magnet 260 will be advantageously used in association with a positioning apparatus similar to the positioning apparatus 56 of FIG. 1 or the other positioning apparatus 256 of FIG. 4 , the magnet may be used in situations where the positioning apparatus is not required.
- the positioning apparatus 256 ( FIG. 4 ) positions the guide rod 250 relative to the patient's trachea 228 during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea.
- the positioning apparatus 256 provides an indication of the distance which the guide rod is to be moved into the patient's trachea. By using the positioning apparatus 256 , a person moving the guide rod 250 into the patient's trachea 228 can know where the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod is located relative to the trachea.
- the guide tube 264 is formed of a resilient polymeric material.
- the guide tube 264 has a main section 266 and a leading end section 268 .
- the leading end section 268 has a side wall 270 which is thinner than a side wall 272 of the main section 266 .
- the side wall 270 is integrally molded as one piece with the thicker side wall 272 .
- a generally cylindrical passage 274 ( FIG. 5 ) extends axially through the guide tube 264 .
- the thin walled leading end section 268 of the guide tube 264 is molded so as to naturally assume the arcuate configuration illustrated in FIGS. 4 and 5 . This enables the end section 268 of the guide tube 264 to be positioned in the patient's pharynx 220 ( FIG. 4 ) with the end section forming a bend which extends around the upper end portion of the patient's epiglottis 242 . Since the leading end section 268 has a relatively thin side wall ( FIG. 5 ), the end section can be easily deflected as it is moved into position in the patient's pharynx 220 .
- the thicker side wall 272 of the main section 266 of the guide tube 264 is effective to support the leading end section 268 in the patient's pharynx 220 and to depress a tongue 76 in the mouth 212 of the patient ( FIG. 1 ).
- the guide rod 250 may be formed of either polymeric material or metal.
- the illustrated polymeric guide rod 250 has a relatively small diameter and is readily deflected.
- the guide rod 250 has a circular cross sectional configuration.
- the guide rod 250 extends axially through the guide tube 264 ( FIG. 4 ).
- the guide rod 250 is axially movable relative to the guide tube 264 under the influence of force manually applied to the portion of the guide rod disposed to the right (as viewed in FIG. 4 ) of the positioning apparatus 256 . This force results in axial movement of the guide rod 250 along the guide tube 264 .
- the arcuate leading end section 268 of the guide tube 264 resiliently deflects the guide rod 250 to form the arcuate bend illustrated in FIG. 4 .
- the leading end 52 of the guide rod moves downward (as viewed in FIG. 4 ) toward the larynx 230 .
- tissues which may tend to block movement of the guide rod are pushed aside by the leading end of the guide rod. This clears a passage for the guide rod 250
- the positioning apparatus 256 is used to locate the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 as the guide rod moves along the guide tube 264 .
- the positioning apparatus 256 includes a base section 278 and an upper section 280 ( FIG. 4 ).
- the base section 278 engages the patient's Adam's apple 234 to locate the positioning apparatus 256 relative to the patient's trachea 228 .
- the upper section 280 of the positioning apparatus 256 holds the guide tube 264 which guides movement of the guide rod 250 during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea 228 .
- the base section 278 and upper section 280 of the positioning apparatus 256 cooperate to provide a measurement of the distance between the patient's mouth 212 and the patient's Adam's apple 234 .
- This distance will vary from patient to patient depending upon the size of the patient, the specific configuration of the head 210 of the patient, and other factors.
- the distance which the guide rod 250 must be moved axially relative to the guide tube 264 to move the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod into the patient's larynx 230 will vary as a function of variations in the distance between the patient's mouth 212 and the patient's Adam's apple 234 . This is because the patient's Adam's apple 234 is located adjacent to the entrance to the trachea 228 .
- the base section 278 of the positioning apparatus 256 includes an upright tubular cylindrical body section 286 .
- the body section 286 has a cylindrical chamber 288 .
- the cylindrical upper section 280 of the positioning apparatus 256 is telescopically received in the chamber 288 .
- the base section 278 includes an end section 290 .
- the end section 290 extends perpendicular to the body section 286 .
- the end section 290 has a cylindrical central passage 292 which extends perpendicular to and intersects the central axis of the chamber 288 .
- the body section 286 and the end section 290 are integrally molded as one piece of polymeric material.
- the base section 278 also includes a positioning section 296 which engages the patient's Adam's apple 234 and is supported by the end section 290 .
- the positioning section 296 includes a cylindrical support rod 298 which extends through the passage 292 and is connected with a locating portion 302 which engages the patient's Adam's apple 234 .
- the locating portion 302 includes a generally hemispherical dome 304 and a resilient annular collar 306 which is connected to the rim of the dome 304 .
- the collar 306 extends around the Adam's apple 234 and engages upper and lower sides and left and right sides of the Adam's apple to center the dome 304 on the Adam's apple.
- the locating portion 302 could be constructed to engage only two sides of the Adam's apple 234 .
- the left and right sides of the Adam's apple 234 It is believed that it may be desired to form the locating portion 302 with the construction illustrated in FIGS. 25 and 26 herein.
- the locating portion 302 could be constructed so as to engage only the central portion of the Adam's apple 234 .
- the locating portion 302 may be formed so that it extends around the Adam's apple 234 so as to locate the positioning section 296 relative to the Adam's apple. Force may be manually applied against the positioning section 296 to minimize the anterior bend 240 ( FIG. 10 ) which must be formed in the tracheal tube 238 .
- the end section 290 is axially slidable along the support rod 298 so that the body section 286 is disposed adjacent to the chin 310 of the patient.
- the patient's Adam's apple 234 could be used to locate the positioning apparatus 256 relative to the patient's trachea 228 .
- a different portion of the patient's body could be used to locate the positioning apparatus relative to the patient's trachea.
- the patient's shoulders could be used.
- bones in the patient's neck 216 could be used to locate the positioning apparatus 256 relative to the patient's trachea 228 .
- the upper section 280 of the positioning apparatus 256 includes a cylindrical rod portion 314 which is telescopically received in the body section 286 of the positioning apparatus.
- An upper end section 316 has a cylindrical passage 318 through which the guide tube 264 extends.
- the passage 318 has a longitudinal central axis which extends parallel to the longitudinal central axis of the passage 292 and to the longitudinal central axis of the support rod 298 .
- the guide tube 264 is slidable in the passage 318 .
- the guide tube 264 extends from the passage 318 into the patient's mouth 212 .
- the passage 318 in the upper section 280 of the positioning apparatus 256 is axially aligned with the patient's mouth 212 .
- the passage 292 ( FIG. 4 ) in the end section 290 of the base section 278 of the positioning apparatus 256 is axially aligned with the patient's Adam's apple 234 . Therefore, the positioning apparatus 256 can be utilized to measure the distance between the Adam's apple 234 and the patient's mouth 212 .
- the entrance through which the guide rod 250 must pass into the patient's trachea 228 is adjacent to the Adam's apple 234 . Therefore, the distance through which the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 must be moved relative to the guide tube 264 ( FIG. 4 ) to enter the patient's trachea 228 , is a function of the distance between the patient's Adam's apple 234 and the patient's mouth 212 .
- the positioning apparatus 256 measures the distance between the patient's Adam's apple 234 and the patient's mouth by determining the position of the base section 278 and upper section 280 of the positioning apparatus relative to each other.
- the distance between the patient's Adam's apple 234 and the patient's mouth 212 is indicated by indicia 324 ( FIG. 6 ).
- the indicia 324 is disposed on the cylindrical rod portion 314 of the upper section 280 of the positioning apparatus 256 .
- the rod portion 314 is telescopically received in the cylindrical chamber 288 in the body section 286 of the positioning apparatus 256 .
- the position of an annular upper end surface 328 on ( FIG. 6 ) the body section 286 relative to the indicia 324 indicates the distance which the rod portion 314 is extended from the body section 286 .
- the distance which the rod portion 314 is extended from the body section 286 is a function of the distance between the patient's Adam's apple 234 and the entrance to the patient's mouth 212 .
- the indicia 324 is formed by a plurality of colored bands 330 , 332 , 334 , 336 , 338 and 340 ( FIG. 6 ).
- Each of the bands 330 - 340 has a different color from the other bands. It should be understood that a lesser or greater number of colored bands 330 - 340 could be provided if desired. It should also be understood that although the bands 330 - 340 have the same axial extent, the bands could have different axial extents if desired. Rather than using the colored bands 330 - 340 as the indicia 324 , numerical indicia could be provided. However, it is believed that it may be easier to read the different colored bands 330 - 340 than to read numerical indicia.
- Bands 342 , 344 , 346 , 348 , and 350 are provided on the guide rod 250 .
- the colored bands 342 - 350 have different colors which correspond to the colors of the bands 132 - 140 on the rod portion 314 ( FIG. 6 ) of the positioning apparatus 256 . It should be understood that although only the bands 342 - 350 having colors corresponding to the colors of the bands 132 - 140 are illustrated, an additional band having a color corresponding to the color of the band 330 in FIG. 6 is provided on the guide rod 250 .
- the bands 342 - 350 ( FIG. 8 ) on the guide rod 250 cooperate with an annular end surface 356 ( FIG. 4 ) on the guide tube 264 to indicate when the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod is in a desired position relative to the patient's trachea 228 .
- the band 344 ( FIG. 8 ) on the guide rod 250 will be moved to a position in which it is partially covered by the guide tube 264 and projects outward from the end surface 356 ( FIG.
- the band 344 has a color which is the same as the color of the band 334 .
- the bands 342 - 350 ( FIG. 8 ) on the guide rod 250 are spaced a predetermined distance from the end surface 356 ( FIG. 4 ) on the guide tube 264 when the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod is disposed in abutting engagement with the leading end section 268 of the guide tube 264 .
- the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 will have moved from the pharynx 220 of the patient and into the larynx 230 past the vocal cords 232 .
- the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod advances downward (as viewed in FIG. 4 ) in the trachea 228 of the patient. Movement of the guide rod 250 into the trachea 228 of the patient is interrupted when the band 344 having a color corresponding to the color of the band 334 ( FIG. 6 ) has been partially covered by the guide tube 264 .
- the magnet 260 is utilized to steer the guide rod 250 during movement of the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod from the patient's mouth 212 into the patient's trachea 228 .
- the magnet 360 is moved downward along the outside of the patient's neck.
- the magnetic field provided by the magnet 360 is effective to pull the leading end portion 252 downward as the magnet moves downward.
- the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 and magnet 260 will move downward from the entrance to the trachea 228 through a desired distance, for example a distance of approximately ten centimeters.
- the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 could be moved through a different distance into the trachea 228 if desired.
- the distance between the patient's Adam's apple 234 and the entrance to the patient's mouth 212 will vary from patient to patient. However, the distance which the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 is moved into the patient's trachea 228 will remain constant at a desired distance, for example, ten centimeters. This is because as the distance measured by the positioning apparatus 256 increases, the distance which the guide rod 250 is moved relative to the guide tube 264 increases. Conversely, as the distance which is measured by the positioning apparatus 256 decreases, the distance which the guide rod 250 is moved relative to the guide tube 264 decreases. The distance which is measured by the positioning apparatus 256 varies as a function of the distance between the mouth 212 and larynx 230 of the patient.
- the guide tube 264 and positioning apparatus 256 are separated from the guide rod 250 while the guide rod remains stationary relative to the patient's trachea.
- the indicia on the guide rod 250 indicates that the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod has been moved through a desired distance into the patient's trachea 228
- axial movement of the guide rod 250 is interrupted.
- one of the colored bands 342 - 350 on the guide rod 250 corresponding to the one of the colored bands 330 - 340 aligned with the end surface 328 ( FIG. 4 ) on the body section 286 of the positioning apparatus is aligned with the end surface 356 ( FIG. 4 ) on the guide tube 264 .
- the guide tube 264 is then slid axially outward, that is toward the right as viewed in FIG. 4 , along the guide rod 250 .
- the guide rod is manually held against movement relative to the patient's mouth 212 and trachea 228 .
- the positioning apparatus 256 is moved away from the patient along with the guide tube 264 .
- the tracheal tube 238 is slid along the guide rod 250 into the patient's trachea 228 .
- the end of the guide rod 250 remote from the patient's mouth 212 and trachea 228 is inserted into the tracheal tube 238 .
- the guide rod 250 is manually held against movement relative to the patient's mouth 212 and trachea 228 .
- the tracheal tube 238 is then moved axially along the guide rod 250 while the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod remains stationary in the patient's trachea.
- the magnet 260 may be utilized to attract the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 , in the manner illustrated in FIG. 9 , to facilitate maintaining of the leading end portion of the guide rod stationary in the patient's trachea 228 .
- the guide rod directs the leading end portion of the tracheal tube along a bend 360 ( FIG. 9 ) formed in the guide rod.
- the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 238 enters the patient's larynx and moves past the vocal cords 232 .
- the leading end of the tracheal tube 238 is centered in the space between the vocal cords and the entrance to the patient's trachea by the guide rod 250 . This minimizes irritation of the patient's vocal cords 232 .
- the tracheal tube 238 is moved along the guide rod 250 at least until the leading end of the tracheal tube engages the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 .
- the tracheal tube 238 may be moved further into the patient's trachea than the distance which the guide rod 250 is moved into the patient's trachea. If this is the case, the tracheal tube 238 is pushed axially along the guide rod 250 past the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod. As this occurs, the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 is compressed slightly and enters the tracheal tube 238 .
- the guide rod 250 is removed from the tracheal tube ( FIG. 10 ).
- the tracheal tube 238 then provides a passage for the conduction air, other gases, and/or medication to the patient's lungs.
- the guide rod 250 When the tracheal tube 238 is to be inserted into a patient's trachea 228 , the guide rod 250 is first positioned relative to the guide tube 264 at a location spaced from the patient. At this time, the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 is disposed in abutting engagement with the leading end portion 268 of the guide tube 264 .
- the upper section 280 of the positioning apparatus 256 is loosely positioned on the guide tube 264 .
- the lower or base section 278 of the positioning apparatus 256 is separate and spaced from the upper section 280 of the positioning apparatus.
- a suitable lubricant may be applied to the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 and to the leading end portion 268 of the guide tube 264 .
- the guide tube 264 is then inserted into the patient's mouth 212 .
- the leading end portion 268 of the guide tube 264 and the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 move from the patient's mouth into the pharynx 220 of the patient.
- the natural resilience of the material of the guide tube causes the guide tube to spring back to its initial or free configuration illustrated in FIGS. 3 and 4 .
- the guide tube 264 and guide rod 250 As the guide tube 264 and guide rod 250 are manually moved together into the patient's mouth 212 , the guide tube bends itself around the upper (as viewed in FIG. 3 ) portion of the patient's epiglottis 242 . This results in the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 being pointed downward (as viewed in FIG. 3 ) toward the lower end portion of the patient's pharynx 220 .
- a person initially inserting the guide tube 264 and guide rod 250 into the patient's mouth 212 can visually ascertain when the guide tube and guide rod have moved to the position illustrated in FIG. 3
- the positioning apparatus 256 is assembled.
- the rod portion 314 of the upper section 280 is telescopically inserted into the chamber 288 in the body section 286 of the positioning apparatus.
- the locating portion 302 of the positioning apparatus 296 is moved into engagement with the patient's Adam's apple 234 .
- the base section 278 and upper section 280 of the positioning apparatus 256 are moved axially along the guide tube 264 and support rod 298 until the base section and upper section of the positioning apparatus 256 are adjacent to the patient's chin 310 ( FIG. 4 ).
- the coincident central axes of the rod portion 314 and body section 286 of the positioning apparatus 256 will extend perpendicular to the central axes of the guide tube 264 and support rod 298 .
- the magnet 260 is then positioned immediately beneath the patient's Adam's apple 234 . This enables the magnetic field from the magnet 260 to extend leftward and upward (as viewed in FIG. 4 ) to the entrance to the patient's larynx 230 . This results in the magnet 260 and positioning apparatus 256 being disposed in the orientation illustrated in FIG. 3 relative to the patient.
- the person using the positioning apparatus 256 visually determines the distance between the patient's Adam's apple 234 and the patient's mouth 212 . This is accomplished by viewing the indicia 324 ( FIG. 6 ) on the rod portion 314 of the positioning apparatus 256 .
- the operator determines the distance between the patient's Adam's apple and the patient's mouth.
- the distance which the guide rod 250 must be moved into the patient's trachea 228 is a direct function of the distance between the patient's Adam's apple 234 and the patient's mouth 212 .
- the operator then begins to manually apply force against the rightward (as viewed in FIG. 4 ) portion of the guide rod 250 while holding the guide tube 264 against movement. This results in the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod moving downward toward the entrance to the patient's larynx 230 .
- the bent leading end portion 268 of the guide tube 60 directs the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 80 downward around the patient's epiglottis 242 in a direction toward the entrance to the larynx 230 .
- the resiliently deflectable guide rod 250 will initially be formed with a bend which is a continuation of the bend in the leading end portion of the guide tube 264 . Therefore, the natural resilience of the guide rod 250 will tend to cause the guide rod to bend rightward toward the patient's Adam's apple as the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod begins to move downward toward the larynx 230 .
- the field emanating from the magnet 260 attracts the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 .
- the magnetic attraction forces applied to the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 also promote rightward (as viewed in FIG. 4 ) bending of the guide rod 250 toward the patient's Adam's apple 234 .
- the combined effect of the magnet 260 and the natural resilience of the preformed guide rod 250 urge the leading end portions 52 of the guide rod 250 toward the entrance to the larynx 230 and away from the adjacent entrance to the esophagus 226 .
- the magnet 260 could be positioned above or on the patient's Adam's apple 234 and then moved downward as the guide rod 250 advances.
- the flexible guide rod 250 could initially be formed with a straight configuration and only the magnet 260 would steer the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod into the entrance to the trachea 228 .
- the use of the magnet 260 could be eliminated and only the preformed configuration of the guide rod 250 would be used to direct the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod into the entrance to the trachea 228 .
- the colored bands 342 - 350 ( FIG. 8 ) on the guide rod 250 cooperate with the end surface 356 ( FIG. 4 ) of the guide tube 264 to provide an indication of the location of the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod relative to the patient's Adam's apple 234 .
- the indicia bands 342 - 350 will move toward the end surface 356 of the guide rod 250 .
- the indicia on the guide rod 250 will be approaching the end surface 356 of the guide tube 264 .
- One of the bands 330 - 340 having a particular color, for instance, red, on the rod portion 314 ( FIG. 6 ) will be adjacent to the end surface 328 on the body section of the positioning apparatus 256 .
- a correspondingly colored band that is, when the red band 344 on the guide rod 250 ( FIG. 8 )
- the operator will know that the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 will have moved past the vocal 232 to the desired position relative to the patient's trachea. Insertion of the guide rod 250 into the guide tube 264 is then interrupted.
- the guide tube 264 and positioning apparatus 256 are separated from the guide rod 250 .
- the guide rod is maintained stationary relative to a patient's trachea 228 .
- the guide tube 264 is merely moved rightward (as viewed in FIG. 4 ) along the stationary guide rod 250 to disengage the guide tube and the positioning apparatus from the guide rod.
- a slot could be provided in the guide tube 264 to facilitate disengagement of the guide tube from the guide rod.
- a corresponding slot could be formed in the end section 316 of the positioning apparatus 256 .
- the slots in the guide tube 264 and end section 316 could be partially or fully blocked during insertion of the guide rod 250 into the guide tube 264 .
- the guide rod is utilized to guide movement of the tracheal tube 238 into the patient's trachea 228 .
- the tracheal tube 238 has a substantially larger diameter than the guide tube 264 to provide for a relatively large central opening through which air or other gas may pass into the patient's trachea 228 .
- the guide rod 250 When the tracheal tube 238 is to be moved into the patient's trachea 228 , the guide rod 250 is telescopically inserted into the leading end of the tracheal tube. At this time, the right end (as viewed in FIG. 4 ) of the guide rod 250 will extend beyond the far right end of the tracheal tube 238 . Therefore, the guide rod 250 can be manually grasped and the tracheal tube 238 moved axially along the guide rod while the guide rod remains stationary relative to the patient's trachea 228 .
- the tracheal tube 238 is moved leftward, in the manner indicated by the arrow in FIG. 9 , along the stationary guide rod 250 into the patient's mouth 212 .
- the tracheal tube 238 is then moved around the bend 360 in the stationary guide rod 250 and into the patient's trachea 228 . Since the guide rod 250 extends from the patient's pharynx 220 into the trachea 228 , the guide rod 250 blocks movement of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 238 into the patient's esophagus 226 .
- the guide rod 250 acts as a track along which the tracheal tube 238 moves into the patient's larynx 230 and not into the adjacent esophagus 226 .
- the guide rod 250 guides movement of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube in such a manner as to minimize irritation of the vocal cords.
- the guide rod 250 centers the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 238 in the space between the vocal cords.
- the magnet 260 As the tracheal tube 238 is moved through the patient's larynx 230 , the magnet 260 is disposed adjacent to the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 . Therefore, the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 is attracted by the magnet 260 and tends to remain stationary in the patient's trachea 228 . As the tracheal tube 238 is inserted into the patient's trachea 228 , the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 238 moves past the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 . As this occurs, the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 is slightly compressed and moves into the tracheal tube 238 .
- the guide rod 250 is withdrawn from the tracheal tube 238 while the tracheal tube is maintained stationary relative to the patient's trachea.
- the magnet 260 ( FIG. 4 ) is utilized to attract the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 .
- the magnet 260 could be used for other purposes if desired.
- the magnet 260 could be used to position a suture anchor relative to body tissue.
- a leading end portion of the suture anchor is formed of a magnetizable material, such a ferrite.
- the leading end portion of the suture anchor could be formed of a magnetic material such as cobalt, neodymium, cerium, praseodymium, and/or samarium. If this was done, the magnet 260 would be oriented relative to the magnet on the suture anchor to have a pole of the magnet 260 of opposite polarity to the leading end of the suture anchor toward the suture anchor.
- the trailing end portion of the suture anchor may be formed of a nonmagnetic material, such as a biodegradable polymer.
- the suture would extend through an opening in the nonmagnetic material of the trailing end portion of the suture anchor.
- a guide tube 264 is utilized to guide movement of the guide rod 250 as the guide rod is moved from the patient's pharynx 220 into the patient's trachea 228 .
- the guide tube 264 is then removed and a tracheal tube 238 is slid along the guide rod 250 into the patient's trachea.
- the tracheal tube is used to guide movement of the guide rod into the patient's trachea. This eliminates the need for a separate guide tube. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIG. 11 is generally similar to the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 4-9 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “a” being associated being associated with the numerals of FIG. 11 to avoid confusion.
- a patient's head 210 a ( FIG. 11 ) includes a mouth 212 a which is connected with a throat 214 a in a neck 216 a of the patient.
- a pharynx 220 a is connected with an esophagus 226 a and a trachea 228 a .
- a larynx 230 a forms an upper end portion of the trachea 228 a and contains vocal cords 232 a .
- An Adam's apple 234 a is formed by laminae of cartilage in the patient's larynx 230 a.
- a positioning apparatus 256 a is utilized to position a tracheal tube 238 a and a guide rod or wire 250 a during insertion of the guide rod and during insertion of the tracheal tube into the patient's trachea 228 a .
- the tracheal tube 238 a ( FIG. 11 ) is flexible and is formed of a resilient polymeric material.
- the tracheal tube 238 a is initially formed with a bend 380 in a leading end portion of the tracheal tube. When the tracheal tube 238 a is released or unrestrained, the natural resilience of the tracheal tube causes the bend 380 to form in the manner illustrated in FIG. 10 .
- the tracheal tube 238 a is flexible so that the bend 380 is easily removed from the tracheal tube by the application of a relatively small force or pressure against the leading end portion of the tracheal tube.
- the bend 380 in the tracheal tube 238 a has a greater extent than a corresponding bend in a leading end section 268 of the guide tube 264 ( FIG. 4 ). If desired, the bend in the tracheal tube 238 a ( FIG. 11 ) could be shortened so that the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 238 a has a configuration which corresponds to the configuration of the guide tube 264 of FIG. 4
- the positioning apparatus 256 a ( FIG. 11 ) includes a base section 278 a and an upper section 280 a .
- a rod portion 314 a of the upper section 280 a is telescopically received in a chamber 288 a in the base section 278 a .
- Indicia 324 a on the rod portion 314 a cooperates with a body section 286 a of the base section 278 a to provide a visual indication of the distance between the patient's Adam's apple 234 a and the patient's mouth 212 a in the manner previously described in conjunction with the positioning apparatus of FIG. 4 .
- the base section 278 a of the positioning apparatus 256 a includes a positioning section 96 a which engages the patient's Adam's apple 234 a .
- the positioning section 96 a includes a locating portion 302 a which engages the patient's Adam's apple 234 a .
- the locating portion 302 a includes a dome 304 a and a soft annular collar 306 a . Rather than using the collar 306 a , it may be preferred to utilize a pair of positioning fingers which engage the neck 216 a of the patient at laterally opposite sides of the Adam's apple 234 a.
- Indicia is provided on the guide rod 250 a to indicate the position of the guide rod relative to a proximal end of the tracheal tube 238 a , that is, the right end as viewed in FIG. 11 . It should be understood that the tracheal tube 238 a and the guide rod 250 a extend toward the right from the fragmentary end portions illustrated in FIG. 11 .
- the indicia on the guide rod 250 a is formed by bands corresponding to the bands 342 - 350 of FIG. 8 . Rather than cooperating with the end 156 ( FIG. 4 ) of a guide tube 264 , the bands on the guide rod 250 a ( FIG. 11 ) cooperate with an end (not shown) of the tracheal tube 238 a to indicate the position of the guide rod 250 a relative to the tracheal tube 238 a.
- the guide rod 250 a When the guide rod 250 a is to be moved from the patient's pharynx 220 a into the patient's trachea 228 a , the guide rod is moved axially relative to the stationary tracheal tube 238 a . As this occurs, a leading end portion 252 a of the guide rod 250 a moves downward (as viewed in FIG. 11 ) past the patient's vocal cords or folds 32 a and into the patient's trachea. As the leading end portion 252 a of the guide rod 250 a moves from the patient's pharynx 220 a into the patient's trachea 228 a , the leading end portion of the guide rod gently deflects body tissue. For example, the leading end portion 252 a of the guide rod 250 a may gently engage and slightly deflect the patient's vocal cords or folds 32 a.
- a magnet 260 a is initially positioned adjacent to the patient's Adam's apple 234 a , in the manner indicated in dashed lines in FIG. 11 . Ferrite particles in the soft, resiliently compressible leading end portion 252 a of the guide wire 250 a are attracted by the magnet 260 a . This attraction causes the leading end portion 252 a of the guide wire 250 a to move into the open upper end portion of the trachea 228 rather than into the adjacent open upper end portion of the esophagus 226 a . In addition, movement of the leading end portion 252 a of the guide wire 250 a into the open upper end portion of the trachea 228 is promoted by the bend 380 in the tracheal tube 238 a . If desired, the magnet 260 a could initially be positioned on or above the patient's Adam's apple 234 a and moved downward from there.
- the guide wire moves downward in the patient's trachea 228 a .
- the magnet 260 a is moved downward along the outer side of the patient's neck 216 a .
- the indicia (not shown) on the guide rod 250 a provides an indication to an operator of the position of the leading end portion 252 a of the guide rod. This enables the operator to follow the leading end portion 252 a of the guide rod 250 a with the magnet 260 a as the guide rod continues to be moved through the tracheal tube 238 a into the patient's trachea 228 a.
- the guide rod 250 a is held stationary relative to the patient's trachea.
- the tracheal tube 238 a is then moved axially toward the left (as viewed in FIG. 11 ) and downward into the patient's trachea 228 a .
- the guide rod 250 a blocks sidewise movement of the leading end of the tracheal tube so that the tracheal tube enters the larynx 230 a rather than the adjacent open upper end of the esophagus 226 a .
- the leading end of the tracheal tube 238 a moves into engagement with the leading end portion 252 a of the guide rod 250 a .
- the leading end portion 252 a of the guide rod 250 a is then compressed somewhat by the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 238 a and moves into the passage in the tracheal tube.
- the tracheal tube 238 a is then moved further into the trachea 228 a.
- the guide rod 250 a is withdrawn from the tracheal tube while the tracheal tube remains stationary relative to the patient's trachea 228 a .
- the positioning apparatus 256 a is then separated from the tracheal tube 238 a.
- a leading end portion 52 of the guide wire or rod 50 is inserted between the vocal cords or folds in the respiratory system 11 of the patient. It's contemplated that movement of the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod 50 between the vocal cords 32 to a desired depth in the patient's trachea 28 may be facilitated by transmitting images of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the guide rod to a viewing location outside of the patient's body. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIG. 12 is generally similar in the embodiment invention illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “b” being added to the numerals of FIG. 12 in order to avoid confusion.
- a positioning apparatus 56 b is utilized to position a flexible guide rod 50 b relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 b .
- the positioning apparatus 56 b includes a base section 78 b which is connected with a positioning section 96 b .
- the positioning section 96 b engages the patient's Adam's apple 34 b .
- An arcuate member 108 b is connected with the base section 78 b .
- the guide rod 50 b is moveable relative to a guide section 114 b connected with arcuate member 108 b .
- the construction and the manner of using the positioning apparatus 56 b and guide rod 50 b is the same as was previously described in conjunction with the embodiment invention illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 .
- light from a light source 400 is conducted through a fiber optic tube 402 to a leading end portion 52 b of the flexible guide rod 50 b .
- the light transmitted from the light source 400 through the fiber optic tube 402 to the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod 50 b is directed from the leading end portion of the guide rod on to adjacent body tissue, in the manner indicated schematically at 404 in FIG. 12 .
- a plurality of fiber optic tubes 402 could be provided to conduct light from the light source 400 to the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod. These fiber optic tubes could be bundled together or could be spaced part at the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod 50 b.
- the light 404 which illuminates the body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod 50 b is reflected from the body tissue and is transmitted through a fiber optic tube 408 to the eye 410 of a viewer. This results in the transmission of an image of the body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod 50 b to the viewer to facilitate visualization, by the viewer, of the body tissue.
- a plurality of fiber optic tubes 408 could be provided to conduct light from the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod to the eye 410 of the viewer. These fiber optic tubes could be bundled together or could be spaced apart at the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod 50 b.
- the viewer can determine the location of the leading end portion of the guide rod relative to the larynx 30 b and vocal chords 32 b of a patient as the leading end portion of the guide rod moves into the larynx and between the vocal chords. Since the light 404 illuminates body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod 50 b , the light enables the viewer to continuously visualize where the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod 50 b is located along the insertion path in the respiratory system 11 b of the patient.
- the fiber optic tubes 402 and 408 extend through the guide rod 50 b to enable an image of body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod to be transmitted to a viewer. It is contemplated that movement of a tracheal tube, corresponding to tracheal tube 38 of FIG. 2 , along the guide rod 50 b into the patient's respiratory system 11 b will be facilitated by illuminating body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube.
- the side wall of the tracheal tube may be provided with fiber optic tubes which transmit light from a light source, such as a light source 400 , to a location immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube and transmit an image of illuminated body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of tracheal tube to a viewer.
- a light source such as a light source 400
- the image transmitted to the viewer will be of body tissue illuminated by both light transmitted from the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod and light transmitted from the leading end portion of the tracheal tube.
- the leading end portion of the tracheal tube may be inserted into trachea 28 b of a patient for greater distance than the distance which the guide rod 50 b is inserted into the trachea.
- illumination from the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 b will be at least partially blocked from transmission back to the viewer through fiber optics in the tracheal tube. Therefore, the viewer will easily be able to determine when the leading end portion of the tracheal tube has moved past the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 b.
- the image transmitted through the fiber optic tube 408 may be displayed on a viewing screen. If this was done, the image transmitted through the fiber optic tube 408 would be transmitted to a computer and a viewing screen associated with the computer would display an image of the body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod 50 b . As the tracheal tube is moved along the guide rod into the patient's respiratory system 11 b , an image of body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube may also be transmitted to the computer.
- a second computer screen may be utilized to display an image of the body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube. If this is done, the surgeon or other viewer would be able to see an image of body tissue immediately ahead the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod 50 b and an image of body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube. When simultaneously viewing the two images on two separate screens or on separate portions of a single screen, the surgeon or other viewer would be able to determine the positions of the leading end portions of both the guide rod 50 b and the tracheal tube relative to each other and to the respiratory system 11 b of a patient.
- the tracheal tube may be utilized by itself.
- fiber optic tubes which extend through the side wall of the tracheal tube and correspond to the fiber optic tubes 402 and 408 of FIG. 12 , would provide an image of the body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube as the tracheal tube is moved into the patient's respiratory system 11 b along an insertion path.
- the image transmitted from the leading end portion of the tracheal tube to the eye of the viewer or to a display screen would enable a surgeon or other viewer to determine the location of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 b.
- the positioning apparatus 56 b may be modified to guide movement of the tracheal tube in much the same manner as in which the positioning apparatus 56 b is utilized to guide movement of the guide rod 50 b . If this is done, colored bands or other indicia could be provided on the tracheal tube to indicate the position of the tracheal tube in the same manner as previously discussed in connection with the guide rods 50 and 250 .
- the positioning apparatus 56 b may be used for purposes other than tracheal intubination.
- the positioning apparatus 56 b may be used to position devices other than the guide rod 50 b during endoscopic, arthroscopic, or fiber optic surgery at any one of many locations in a patient's body.
- a magnet similar to the magnet 260 of FIGS. 4 and 7 may be used to steer a leading end portion of the device being positioned in the patient's body.
- the leading end portion of the device being positioned in the patient's body may be located at a position adjacent to or spaced a desired distance from a positioning section, corresponding to the positioning section 96 b , by the use of suitable indicia, which may be similar to the indicia used in conjunction with the guide rods 50 and 250 .
- the positioning section 96 b is positioned in engagement with a selected portion of the patient's body.
- the selected portion of the patient's body may be a portion of the patient's body other than the Adam's apple 34 b .
- the positioning section could be placed in engagement with a surface disposed within the patient's body if desired
- the guide rod 50 b or a similar elongated member is moved relative to the guide section 114 b connected with the arcuate member 108 b .
- the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod 50 b or similar elongated member is then moved into the patient's body.
- the leading end portion 52 b may be moved into the patient's body through a naturally occurring opening or through an incision formed in the patient's body.
- the image transmitted through the guide rod or similar elongated member 50 b to the viewer will indicate when the leading end portion 52 b has moved to a desired position in the patient's body.
- any desired procedure may be performed in the patient's body.
- a surgical procedure could be conducted with one or more devices connected with the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod or similar elongated member.
- the positioning apparatus 56 b may be used to position a therapeutic agent or device at the desired position in the patient's body.
- the light source 400 and fiber optic tube 402 function as an emitter which emits illumination 404 onto body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion 52 b of the guide rod 50 b to facilitate visualization of the body tissue.
- a plurality of emitters are positioned adjacent to an outer side surface of the patient's neck. A detector on a leading end portion of a guide rod is moved into the patient's respiratory system. Since the embodiment invention illustrated in FIGS. 13 and 14 is generally similar to the embodiment invention illustrated in FIGS. 1 , 2 and 12 , similar numerals will be utilized to identify similar components, the suffix letter “c” being associated with the numerals of FIGS. 13 and 14 to avoid confusion
- a positioning apparatus 56 c ( FIG. 13 ) is utilized to position a flexible guide wire or rod 50 c relative to a respiratory system 11 c of a patient.
- the respiratory system 11 c of the patient extends from the mouth 12 c through a larynx 30 c to a trachea 28 c of the patient.
- the positioning apparatus 56 c engages an Adam's apple 34 c of a patient to locate the guide rod 50 c relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 c.
- the positioning apparatus 56 c has the same general construction and mode operation as the positioning apparatus 56 of FIGS. 1 and 2 .
- the positioning apparatus 56 c includes a base section 78 c having a body section 86 c which is pivotally connected with a positioning section 96 c .
- the positioning section 96 c engages an outer surface of the neck of the patient adjacent to the Adam's apple 34 c to locate the positioning apparatus 56 c relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 c .
- the positioning apparatus 96 c could include a collar which would extend around the patient's Adam's apple 34 c in the matter previously described in conjunction with the embodiment invention illustrated in FIG. 7 .
- the positioning apparatus 96 c could include a pair of fingers which engage opposite lateral sides of the patient's Adam's apple.
- An arcuate member 108 c is connected with and is moveable relative to the body section 86 c of the positioning apparatus 56 c at a connection 110 c .
- a flexible guide rod 50 c is axially slidable relative to a guide section 114 c which is connected with the arcuate member 108 c .
- the construction of the positioning apparatus 56 c is the same as was previously described in conjunction with the embodiment invention illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 .
- a sensor assembly 420 is provided to inform a surgeon or other user of the positioning apparatus 56 c , of the position of the guide rod 50 c relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 c .
- the sensor assembly 420 includes an emitter portion 424 ( FIG. 14 ) which provides an output and a detector portion 426 ( FIG. 13 ) which responds to the output from the emitter portion 424 .
- the emitter portion 424 is positioned on an outer side surface of the neck of the patient adjacent to the Adam's apple 34 c .
- the detector portion 426 is connected with a leading end portion 52 c of a guide rod 50 c .
- the emitter portion 424 could be connected with the guide rod 50 c and the detector portion 426 positioned adjacent to the Adam's apple 34 c of the patient.
- the emitter portion 424 of the sensor assembly 420 includes a plurality of emitters units 430 which are positioned an array which extends around the Adam's apple 34 c ( FIG. 14 ) of the patient.
- the emitter units 430 are secured to the neck of the patient by a suitable adhesive.
- the emitter units 430 may be positioned in any desired spatial relationship with the patient's Adam's apple 34 c.
- the emitter units 430 may be connected with the positioning section 96 c .
- the positioning section 96 c of the positioning apparatus 56 c is provided with three fingers which engage the neck of the patient adjacent to the Adam's apple 34 c .
- Each of the emitter units 430 may be connected with one of the fingers of the positioning section 96 c .
- the positioning section 96 c would accurately locate the emitter units 430 relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 c.
- the positioning section 96 c engages the Adam's apple 34 c and the emitter units are disposed in a generally circular array which extends around the Adam's apple 34 c .
- the emitter units 430 could be connected with a collar, similar to the collar 306 of FIG. 7 .
- the collar may be connected with the positioning section 96 c ( FIG. 13 ).
- the collar could be separate from the positioning apparatus.
- the positioning apparatus 56 c may be omitted and the guide rod 50 c moved along an insertion path into the patient's respiratory system without benefit of the assistance provided by the positioning apparatus. If this is done, the emitter units 430 ( FIG. 14 ) could be connected with a support structure which holds the emitter units 430 in a fixed relationship relative to each other and facilitates positioning of the emitter units relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 c .
- a positioning section having a plurality of fingers could be manually centered on the patient's Adam's apple 34 c to locate the emitter units 430 relative to the Adam's apple.
- a collar corresponding to the collar 306 of FIG. 7 , could be provided on a circular or oval support which would extend around the patient's Adam's apple 34 c to locate the emitter units 430 relative to the patient's Adam's apple.
- this apparatus could be manually positioned relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 c without being connected with a positioning apparatus having a construction similar to the construction of the positioning apparatus 56 c.
- the positioning section 96 c is positioned in engagement with the patient's Adam's apple 34 c .
- the emitter units 430 may be suitably mounted on the positioning section 96 c . This would locate the emitter units 430 relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 c ( FIG. 14 ). It should be understood that the emitter units 430 could be mounted on a support other than the positioning section 96 c if desired. Of course, the emitter units 430 may be secured directly to the neck of the patient by a suitable adhesive, as illustrated in FIG. 14 . When this is done, a support structure interconnecting the emitter units 430 may be used to facilitate positioning of the emitter units relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 c.
- the arcuate member 108 c is then positioned axially along the body section 86 c .
- the connection 110 c is secured to hold the arcuate member against axial movement along the body section.
- the arcuate member 108 c is then moved relative to the body section 86 c to position the guide section 114 c and the leading end portion 52 c of the guide rod 50 c in alignment with the entrance to the patient's mouth 11 c .
- the guide rod 50 c is then moved into the patient's respiratory system 11 c along an insertion path.
- the detector portion 426 of the sensor assembly 420 approaches the emitter units 430 . As this occurs, the detector portion provides an output over leads 434 and 436 to a computer or micro processor 438 .
- the computer or micro processor has an output, indicated schematically at 440 , which can be viewed by a surgeon or other individual moving the guide rod 50 c along the insertion path into the patient's respiratory system 11 c.
- the computer output may include a display having a schematic illustration of a typical patient's respiratory system.
- the positions of the emitter units 430 relative to the typical respiratory system and the position of the detector portion 426 relative to the emitter units 430 would be indicated on the display.
- a display screen connected with the computer 438 has an illustration representative of the patient's respiratory system 11 c .
- a plurality of indicators are provided on the display screen to indicate the positions of the emitter units 430 relative to the schematic illustration of the patient's trachea.
- An indicator is provided to indicate the position of the leading end of the guide rod 50 c relative to the schematic illustration of the patient's respiratory system.
- the display screen has one illustration of the patient's respiratory system 11 c as viewed in a medial plane and another illustration of the patient's respiratory system as viewed in a frontal plane.
- Indicators corresponding to the emitter units 430 and detector 426 are provided in both illustrations.
- the detector portion 426 of the sensor assembly 420 approaches the emitter portion 424 of the sensor assembly. As this occurs, the strength of the output from the detector portion 426 through the leads 434 and 436 increases. As the strength of the output from the detector portion 426 increases, the computer and the associated display indicates to an operator of the apparatus 56 c that the leading end portion 52 c of the guide rod 50 c is approaching a junction between the patient's esophagus 26 c and the pharynx.
- the strength of the output signal provided by the detector portion 426 will increase. However, if the leading end portion 52 c of the guide rod 50 c enters the patient's esophagus 26 c , the strength of the output signal from the detector portion 426 will decrease. The decreasing strength of the signal from the detector portion 426 provides a clear indication to the operator of the apparatus 56 c that the leading end portion 52 c of the guide rod 50 c has deviated from its intended course.
- the strength of the signal transmitted to the computer 438 will be maximized.
- the strength of the signal transmitted through the leads 434 and 436 to the computer 438 will decrease to indicate to the operator of the apparatus 56 c that the leading end portion 52 c of the guide rod has moved past the patient's Adam's apple 34 c.
- the computer output information could be transmitted in a different manner if desired.
- the computer 438 could have a light display system which indicates how close the detector 426 is to the emitter units 430 .
- the computer 438 could have an audio output which indicates how close the detector 426 is to the emitter units.
- the computer could have an output which is a combination of a display screen, lights and/or audio signals.
- the positioning apparatus 56 c may be disconnected from the guide rod 50 c .
- a tracheal tube corresponding to tracheal tube 38 of FIG. 2 , is then moved along the guide rod 50 c into the patient's trachea 28 c .
- the manner in which the tracheal tube is moved along the guide rod 50 c into the patient's trachea 28 c is the same as was previously discussed in conjunction with the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 .
- a magnet corresponding to the magnet 260 of FIGS. 4 and 7 , may be utilized to steer the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 c .
- an electromagnet which can be turned on and off may be utilized.
- the tracheal tube which is utilized in association with the guide rod 50 c of FIG. 13 may have the same construction as the tracheal tube 38 utilized with the guide rod 50 of FIG. 2 .
- the tracheal tube utilized with the guide rod 50 c may have a second detector portion, having the same construction as the detector portion 426 of the guide rod 50 c . If the tracheal tube is provided with a second detector portion, the emitter portion 424 of the sensor assembly 420 is maintained in position relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 c.
- the output from the second detector portion may be utilized to locate the leading end portion of the tracheal tube as the tracheal tube is moved along the guide rod 50 c into the patient's respiratory system 11 c . If this is done, leads, corresponding to the leads 434 and 436 would extend along the side wall of the tracheal tube from the second detector portion to the computer 438 . The output from the computer 438 would indicate the position of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube relative to the emitter 424 . The output from the second detector portion on the leading end portion of tracheal tube would indicate the position of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube relative to the position of the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 c.
- the output from the computer may be a display having the construction previously described in conjunction with the guide rod 50 c .
- a display screen connected with the computer 438 has an illustration representative of the patient's respiratory system 11 c .
- a plurality of indicators are provided on the display screen to indicate the positions of the emitter units 430 relative to the patient's trachea.
- An indicator is provided to indicate the position of the leading end of the tracheal tube relative to the patient's respiratory system.
- the display screen has one illustration of the patient's respiratory system 11 c as viewed in a medial plane and another illustration of the patient's respiratory system as viewed in a frontal plane.
- Indicators corresponding to the emitter units 430 and detector on the tracheal tube are provided in both illustrations.
- the emitter units 430 are magnets which emit a magnetic field.
- the detector portion 426 is a magnetometer which responds to variations in the strength of a magnetic field. Thus, the output from the detector portion 426 increases as the detector portion moves closer to the patient's Adam's apple 34 c and the magnets forming the emitter units 430 .
- the detector portion 436 may be Hall effect device, magnetoresistor, or a galvanometer device. Regardless of what specific type of magnetic field responsive device is utilized to form the detector portion 426 of the sensor assembly, the output from the detector portion will vary as the distance between the leading end portion 52 c of the guide rod 50 c and the magnets in the emitter units 430 varies.
- the sensor assembly 420 is the type which responds to a magnetic field.
- the sensor assembly 420 could be constructed so as to respond to other types of emissions.
- light sources could be utilized as the emitter units 430 and the detector portion 436 may be a photo cell which responds to variations in the amount of light received.
- the emitter units 430 could be sources of radio frequency radiation and the detector portion 426 could be constructed so as to have an output which varies as the distance between the detector portion and the sources of radio frequency radiation varies.
- the emitter units 430 could be ultrasonic transducers and the detector 426 could respond to ultrasonic energy.
- the sensor assembly 420 has been illustrated in FIGS. 13 and 14 in association with the positioning apparatus 56 c . However, it should be understood that the sensor assembly 420 could be utilized in association with the positioning apparatus 256 of FIGS. 4-10 or the positioning apparatus 256 a of FIG. 11 . If this was done, the use of the magnet 260 or 260 a ( FIGS. 4 , 7 and 11 ) may be eliminated to avoid interference with magnetic fields from the emitter units 430 . Of course, if the emitter units provided outputs which were not affected by the magnetic field from the magnets 260 and 260 a , the magnets 260 and 260 a could still be utilized.
- the positioning apparatus 56 c and sensor assembly 420 have been illustrated in association with a tracheal intubination procedure. It is contemplated that the positioning apparatus 56 c and/or sensor assembly 420 may be used in association with other medical procedures if desired. For example, the positioning apparatus 56 c and/or sensor assembly 420 may be used in the performance of endoscopic, arthroscopic or fiber optic surgical procedures. The positioning apparatus 56 c and/or sensor assembly 420 may be used in association with surgery on joints or other portions of a patient's body. The positioning apparatus 56 c and/or sensor assembly 420 may be used to deliver medicants to a desired location in a patient's body
- the emitter portion 424 of the sensor assembly 420 is disposed adjacent to the outer surface of the neck of the patient while the detector portion 426 of the sensor assembly is connected with the guide rod 50 c .
- the detector portion of the sensor assembly is disposed adjacent to the outer surface of the patient's neck and the emitter portion of the sensor assembly is connected with the leading end portion of the guide rod. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated FIGS. 15 and 16 is generally similar to the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 1 , 2 , 13 and 14 , similar numerals will be utilized to identify similar components, the suffix letter “d” being associated with the numerals of FIGS. 15 and 16 to avoid confusion.
- the positioning apparatus 56 d is utilized to position a flexible guide rod 50 d relative to a patient's respiratory system 11 d .
- the positioning apparatus 56 d includes a base section 78 d having a body section 86 d and a positioning section 96 d .
- An arcuate member 108 d is connected with the body section 86 d at a connection 110 d .
- the connection 110 d is actuated to hold the member 108 d against axial movement along the body section 86 d .
- the connection 110 d is again actuated to hold the arcuate member 108 d against movement relative to the base section 86 d.
- the guide section 114 d cooperates with the flexible guide rod 50 d to position the guide rod during movement of the guide rod into the patient's respiratory system 11 d along an insertion path.
- the general construction and mode of operation of the positioning apparatus 56 d is the same as was previously described in conjunction with the positioning apparatus 56 of FIGS. 1 and 2 .
- a sensor assembly 420 d is provided to sense when the guide rod 50 d has moved to a desired position relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 d .
- the sensor assembly 420 d includes a detector portion 426 d ( FIG. 16 ) and an emitter portion 424 d ( FIG. 15 ).
- the sensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d is positioned on the outer surface of a neck of a patient ( FIG. 16 ) adjacent to the patient's Adam's apple 34 d .
- the emitter portion 424 d is connected with a leading end portion 52 d of the guide rod 50 d ( FIG. 15 ).
- the sensor portion 426 d ( FIG. 16 ) is mounted directly on the patient's neck by a suitable adhesive. However, if desired, the sensor portion 426 d could be connected with the positioning section 96 d of the positioning apparatus 56 d .
- the sensor portion 426 of the sensor assembly 420 d would also positioned relative to the patient's Adam's apple.
- the sensor portion 426 d could be mounted on a support and positioned relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 d independently of the positioning section 96 d of the positioning apparatus 56 d.
- the sensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d includes a plurality of sensor units 440 which are disposed in an array around the patient's Adam's apple 34 d ( FIG. 16 ).
- the sensor units 440 have leads 442 which are connected with a computer or micro processor 444 .
- the computer or micro processor 444 has an output, indicated schematically in 446 in FIG. 16 , which is indicative of the position of the emitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d relative to the position of the sensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly.
- the emitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d is connected with the leading end portion 52 d of the guide rod 50 d.
- the leading end portion 52 d of the flexible guide rod 50 d is aligned with the mouth 12 d of the patient.
- the guide rod 50 d is then moved into the patient's respiratory system 11 d along an insertion path.
- the emitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d approaches the sensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d . As this occurs, the strength of the output from the sensor units 440 increases.
- the output 446 from the computer 444 may take the form of a display which schematically indicates the position of the emitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d relative to the sensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly.
- a display screen for the computer 444 may have a schematic illustration representative of a typical patient's respiratory system. The display screen would indicate the position of the sensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d relative to the patient's respiratory system and the position of the emitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d relative to the patient's respiratory system.
- the display for the computer 444 would indicate the position of the leading end portion 52 d of the guide rod relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 d.
- the output 446 from the computer 444 could take a different form if desired.
- the computer could have an audio output.
- a display graph formed of a series of lights could provide a visual output. As the emitter portion 424 d approaches the sensor units 440 , the number of illuminated lights in the series of lights would increase. When the emitter portion 424 d is aligned with the center of the array of sensor units 440 and the patient's Adam's apple 34 d , the entire series of lights would be illuminated.
- the output 446 from the computer 444 could include both audio and visual outputs.
- the emitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d is a magnet which emits a magnetic field.
- the sensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d has an output which varies as a function of the strength of the magnetic field at the sensor units. Therefore, as the leading end portion 52 d of the guide rod 50 d approaches the patient's Adam's apple 34 d , the strength of the magnetic field to the sensor units 440 increases and the output transmitted to the computer 444 increases.
- the sensor units 440 are Hall effect devices. However, it is contemplated that other known devices which respond to variations in a magnetic field may be utilized in place of the Hall effect devices which form the sensor units 440 . For example, magnetoresistors could be utilized as the sensor units 440 in place of the Hall effect devices.
- the positioning apparatus 56 d is disconnected from the guide rod 50 d while the guide rod is maintained stationary relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 d .
- a flexible tracheal tube corresponding to the tracheal tube 38 of FIG. 2 , is then moved along the guide rod 50 d into the patient's respiratory system 11 d .
- the manner of insertion of the tracheal tube into the patient's respiratory system 11 d , by sliding the tracheal tube along the guide rod 50 d is the same as was previously described in conjunction with the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIG. 2 .
- the sensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d can be utilized in association with the tracheal tube.
- the tracheal tube can be provided with a second emitter portion having the same construction as the emitter portion 424 d .
- a magnet which emits a magnetic field, would be mounted on a leading end portion of the tracheal tube.
- the magnet on the leading end portion of the tracheal tube would have an effect on the sensor units 440 .
- the effect on the magnet on the sensor units 440 increases as the leading end portion of the tracheal tube approaches the patient's Adam's apple 34 d .
- the tracheal tube may be inserted into the patient's trachea 28 d further than the guide rod 50 d . If this is done, the output from the sensor units 440 d diminishes in magnitude as the leading end portion of the tracheal tube is moved down the patient's trachea past the sensor units.
- the sensor assembly 420 d could be utilized separately from the positioning apparatus.
- the sensor units 440 may be mounted in an array on a separate support structure. The support structure would be positioned in an engagement with the exterior of the patient's neck with the array of sensor units 440 centered about the patient's Adam's apple, in the manner illustrated schematically in FIG. 16 .
- the guide rod 50 d would then be moved along the patient's respiratory system 11 d without benefit of the positioning apparatus 56 d .
- the strength of the magnetic field from the emitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d detected by the sensor units 440 would increase. This would result in an increase in the output from the sensor units 440 to the computer 444 .
- the output 446 from the computer 444 would indicate to the operator moving the guide rod 50 d , the position of the guide rod along an insertion path into the patient's respiratory system 11 d.
- the tracheal tube would be moved along the guide rod into the patient's respiratory system 11 d .
- the tracheal tube could have the same construction and move in the same manner as the tracheal tube 38 of FIG. 2 .
- the tracheal tube could be provided with a second emitter portion, corresponding to the emitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 .
- a magnet could be provided on the leading end portion of the tracheal tube. As the leading end portion of the tracheal tube moves along the insertion path into the patient's respiratory system 11 d , the magnetic field detected by the sensor units 440 would increase due to the magnet connected with the leading end portion of the tracheal tube approaching the magnet on the leading end portion 52 d of the guide rod 50 d.
- the tracheal tube could be positioned relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 d without benefit of the guide rod 50 d .
- the tracheal tube would be provided with an emitter corresponding to the emitter 424 d .
- the output from the emitter connected to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube would be detected by the sensor units 440 .
- the output from the sensor units 440 would indicate the position of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 d.
- magnets have been utilized as emitter units.
- the magnets which form the emitter portion 424 of the sensor assembly 420 are permanent magnets formed of a strongly magnetizable material such as cobalt or neodymium.
- a strongly magnetizable material such as cobalt or neodymium.
- other know magnetizable materials having saturation magnetization values such as cerium, praseodymium and or samarium with cobalt and/or other materials could be used.
- the magnets in the emitter portion 424 ( FIG. 14) and 424 d ( FIG. 15 ) could be electromagnets.
- the detector portion 426 ( FIG. 13) and 426 d ( FIG. 16 ) of the sensor assemblies 420 and 420 d may be any known device which respond to changes in the strength and/or direction of a magnet field.
- the detector portions 426 include one or more Hall effect devices and/or one or more magnetoresistors.
- the emitter portions 424 and 424 d of the sensor assemblies 420 and 420 d have been described herein as emitting magnetic fields, it is contemplated that the emitter portions 424 and 424 d could have outputs other than a magnetic field.
- the emitter portions 424 and/or 424 d ( FIGS. 14 and 15 ) could be miniaturized radio frequency devices.
- the emitter portions of the sensor assemblies could be formed by radio signal transmitters having miniaturized radio circuitry which provide a radio frequency output signal. If a radio frequency transmitter is utilized in the emitter portion 424 or 424 d of the sensor assemblies, the sensor portion 426 or 426 d would be a radio frequency receiver.
- the radio frequency receiver could include a receiving antenna which receives radio frequency signals.
- the field of the antenna may be controlled by appropriate placement, orientation, and/or configuration of the antenna.
- the emitter portions 424 and 424 d could emit ultrasonic energy.
- the sensor portion 426 or 426 d would respond to ultrasonic energy.
- the sensor assembly 420 includes a detector portion 426 which is disposed on the leading end portion 52 c of the guide rod 50 c and responds to a magnetic field.
- the operator of the positioning apparatus 56 c is informed, by a display system connected with the computer 438 , of the position of the leading end portion 52 c of the guide rod 50 c relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 c .
- the leading end portion of the guide rod is steerable to enable the other operator to alter the course of movement of the leading end portion of the guide rod to maintain the leading end portion of the guide rod on a desired insertion path into the patient's respiratory system.
- FIGS. 17 and 18 Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 17 and 18 is generally similar in the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 13-16 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “e” being associated with the numerals of FIGS. 17 and 18 to avoid confusion.
- FIGS. 17 and 18 The embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 17 and 18 is utilized with a positioning apparatus having the same construction as the positioning apparatus of FIGS. 1 , 2 , and 13 - 16 . However, the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 17 and 18 could be used with the positioning apparatus 256 and/or 256 a of FIGS. 4-11 if desired.
- the guide rod 50 e of FIGS. 17 and 18 is provided with a steering apparatus 460 .
- the steering apparatus 460 is operable to change the course of movement of the leading end portion 52 e of the flexible guide rod 50 e as the guide rod moves along the insertion path into the patient's respiratory system.
- the steering apparatus 460 applies force against body tissue in the patient's respiratory system to deflect the leading end portion 52 e of the flexible guide rod 50 e away from an undesired course of movement. For example, when the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 e is approaching a junction between the patient's esophagus 26 ( FIG. 1 ) and trachea 28 , the steering apparatus 460 ( FIGS. 17 and 18 ) may be activated to deflect the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e away from the entrance to the patient's esophagus.
- the steering apparatus 460 may be activated to align the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod with an opening between vocal chords in the patient's larynx.
- the steering apparatus 460 includes a plurality of expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 ( FIG. 18 ). Although three expandable elements 464 - 468 have been illustrated as being disposed in a circular array about the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e , a greater or lesser number of expandable elements could be provided in association with the leading end portion of the guide rod if desired.
- the expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 are individually activatable so that one, two or all three of the expandable elements can be expanded. For example, just the expandable element 464 ( FIG. 18 ) may be expanded to apply force against the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e to move the guide rod downward (as viewed in FIG. 18 ) relative to a path of movement of the guide rod through the patient's respiratory system. Alternatively, the expandable elements 466 and 468 may be expanded at the same time to deflect the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e upward (as viewed in FIG. 18 ). It is believed that it may be desired to center the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e in a passage in the patient's respiratory system. When this is to be done, all three expandable elements 464 , 466 , and 468 would be expanded.
- the expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 are balloons or bladders which are expanded under the influence of fluid pressure, that is, under the influence of either a gas or a liquid.
- conduits 472 , 474 and 476 are each connected in fluid communication with one of the expandable elements 464 , 466 or 468 .
- fluid under pressure is connected through the conduit 472 to the expandable element 464 .
- the expandable element 466 is to expanded
- fluid under pressure is connected through the conduit 474 to the expandable element 466 .
- fluid under pressure is connect through the conduit 476 to the expandable element 468
- the expandable elements 464 , 466 and/or 468 are contracted. This may be accomplished by connecting the conduits 472 , 474 and/or 476 with a source of suction or low pressure.
- the expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 are contracted under the influence of their own natural resilience. If desired, springs could be provided in association with the expandable elements to contract the expandable elements 464 - 468 .
- the contracted expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 are disposed in engagement with an outer side surface of the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e . If desired, recesses could be provided in the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 e to receive each of the expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 when the expandable elements are in their contracted condition.
- the expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 of a resiliently stretchable polymeric material so that the expandable elements can be expanded, under the influence of fluid pressure, by stretching the material of the expandable elements.
- the resiliently stretched elastomeric material of the expandable elements 464 - 468 will tend to force fluid out of the expandable elements and cause them to return to their contracted conditions.
- the expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 are disposed in either separate recesses or a single annular recess which extends around the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 e .
- the contracted expandable elements do not project outward from the outer side surface of the guide rod 50 e .
- the contracted expandable elements 464 - 468 could be contracted, under the influence of their own natural resilience, into tight abutting engagement with the outer side surface of the guide rod 50 e.
- conduits 472 , 474 and 476 and expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 may be formed in a manner similar to that disposed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/470,142 filed Jun. 6, 1995 by Peter M. Bonutti et al. and entitled Method Of Using Expandable Cannula.
- the disclosure of the aforementioned application Ser. No. 08/470,142 is hereby incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference thereto.
- the expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 could be formed in manners similar to that disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,833,003 and/or 5,197,971.
- expandable elements 464 - 468 are expanded under the influence of fluid pressure, they could be expanded in a different manner if desired.
- mechanical actuators could be provided. The mechanical actuators may be utilized to move members which are not balloons.
- the detector portion 426 e of the sensor assembly includes a detector 480 which responds to an output from an emitter portion of the sensor assembly.
- the detector 480 is enclosed by a soft dome or cap 482 which forms part of the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e .
- the dome or cap 482 cushions engagement of the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e with body tissue along the patient's respiratory system.
- the dome 482 protects the detector portion 426 e.
- the detector 480 may be a Hall effect device which cooperates with emitters, which are magnets, in the manner described in conjunction with FIGS. 13 and 14 .
- the detector 480 may respond to radio frequency radiation.
- the detector 480 could be constructed so as to respond to ultrasonic energy. Rather than providing a detector 480 on the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e , an emitter could be provided in the manner described in conjunction with FIGS. 15 and 16 .
- the detector portion 426 e ( FIG. 17 ) is connected with a computer, similar to the computer 438 of FIG. 13 , by a lead 486 ( FIG. 17 ).
- the output from the computer indicates to an operator the position of the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e relative to the patient's respiratory system.
- the output of the computer will also indicate to the operator when the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e may deviate from the intended course of insertion of the guide rod into the patient's respiratory system.
- the operator may initiate expansion of one or more of the expandable elements 464 - 468 .
- the expandable elements will apply force against the patient's body tissue and against the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e to deflect the guide rod in such a manner as to maintain the guide rod on its intended insertion path into the patient's respiratory system.
- a visual display system illustrative of the patient's respiratory system, may be connected with the computer which receives the output from a sensor assembly 420 or 420 d .
- the computer which receives the output from a sensor assembly 420 or 420 d .
- the steering apparatus 460 and position sensing assembly may be used with devices for purposes other than tracheal intubination.
- the steering apparatus 460 and position sensing assembly used with the guide rod 50 e of FIG. 17 could be used in association with a device which is used to position medicant at a selected location in a patient's body.
- the steering apparatus 460 and position sensing assembly could be used in conjunction with endoscopic, arthroscopic, or fiber optic surgery.
- the steering apparatus 460 is disclosed in conjunction with the guide rod 50 e which is used with a sensor assembly, corresponding with the sensor assembly 420 of FIG. 13 , in which the detector portion is disposed on the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod.
- the steering apparatus is disposed in association with a guide rod having an emitter portion of a sensor assembly disposed on the leading end portion of the guide rod in the manner illustrated in FIGS. 15 and 16 . Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIG. 19 is generally similar to the embodiments of the invention illustrated in FIG. 13-18 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “f” being associated with the numerals of FIG. 19 in order to avoid confusion.
- a guide rod 50 f has a leading end portion 52 f .
- the guide rod 50 f is used with a positioning apparatus similar to the positioning apparatus 56 d of FIG. 15 .
- the flexible guide rod 50 f ( FIG. 19 ) is associated with a sensor assembly corresponding to the sensor assembly 420 d of FIG. 15 .
- the guide rod 50 f has an emitter portion 424 f ( FIG. 19 ) which is connected with the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod.
- the output from the emitter portion 424 f is detected by suitable detectors disposed adjacent to the exterior surface of the patient's neck and to the patient's Adam's apple, in the manner illustrated schematically in FIG. 16 .
- the emitter portion 424 f includes a light source 490 .
- the light source 490 is connected with source of electrical energy by a lead 492 .
- the light source 490 has been illustrated schematically in FIG. 19 as being an incandescent light source. However, it may be preferred to provide a solid state device as a light source 490 .
- one or more light emitting diodes could be disposed on the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f to function as a light source.
- the electrical energy conducted over the lead 492 to the light source 490 may be varied as the light source moves along the insertion path into the patient's respiratory system. For example, if the light source is pulsed from a maximum light emission level to a minimum light emission level, detection of the location of the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f may be facilitated.
- the light source 490 may be detected by suitable photo optic devices, such as photo cells or may be visually detected by the operator of the apparatus associated with the guide rod 50 f .
- suitable photo optic devices such as photo cells
- pulsing the light source will facilitate visual detection of the light source by the operator. It should be understood that both photo electric detection apparatus and visual detection by the operator could be utilized to locate the position of the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f as the guide rod is moved into the patient's respiratory system.
- a steering apparatus 460 f ( FIG. 19 ) is connected with the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f .
- the steering apparatus 460 f includes a plurality of expandable elements 464 f and 466 f . Although only two expandable elements 464 f and 466 f have been illustrated schematically in FIG. 19 , it should be understood that a third expandable element, corresponding to the expandable element 468 of FIG. 18 , is connected with the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f .
- the expandable elements are connected with a source of inflation fluid by conduits 472 f , 474 f and 476 f.
- fluid under pressure is conducted to the expandable elements.
- fluid under pressure which may be either a gas or liquid
- the expandable element 464 f is operated from a contracted condition to an expanded condition of the influence of fluid pressure
- the expandable element applies force against the adjacent body tissues in the patient's respiratory system and applies force against the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f .
- the force applied against the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f deflects the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f downward (as used in FIG. 19 ) to maintain the guide rod on the intended path of insertion into the patient's respiratory system.
- the output from the emitter portion 424 f of the sensor assembly enables the operator to determine when it is necessary to expand one or more of the expandable elements and to determine which of the expandable elements to be expanded.
- the emitter on the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 f is a light source 490 .
- the emitter could be a magnet which cooperates with detectors in the manner previously described in conjunction with FIGS. 15 and 16 .
- the emitter could be a miniaturized radio frequency transmitter.
- sensor assemblies have been illustrated as being associated with a guide rod of a positioning apparatus.
- fiber optics are utilized in association with a light source to enable an operator to view images of body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of a guide rod 50 b .
- a light source and fiber optics are associated with a tracheal tube to enable an operator to view images of body tissue immediately ahead of a leading end portion of the tracheal tube during of insertion of the tracheal tube into a patient's respiratory system. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIG. 20 is generally similar to the embodiments of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 1 , 2 and 12 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “g” being associated with the numerals of FIG. 20 to avoid confusion.
- a flexible tracheal tube 38 g ( FIG. 20 ) has a leading end portion 500 .
- a light source 400 g is disposed on the leading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g .
- the light source 400 g is connected with a source of electrical energy by leads 504 and 506 .
- the light source 400 g illuminates body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g.
- the light source 400 g is mounted on the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 38 g .
- the light source could be disposed at a location remote from the leading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g and illumination transmitted from the light source to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube through a fiber optic tube, corresponding to the fiber optic tube 402 of FIG. 12 .
- a plurality of fiber optic tubes could be utilized if desired.
- the light source 400 g has been illustrated schematically in FIG. 20 as being an incandescent light source. However, it is contemplated that one or more solid state devices, such as light emitting diodes, could form the light source 400 g if desired. A plurality of light sources 400 g could be disposed in a circular array on the leading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g.
- a prismatic lens 510 is also mounted on the leading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g .
- the lens 510 is enclosed by a transparent dome 512 which is connected with the leading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g .
- Light is transmitted from the lens 510 through a fiber optic tube 408 g to the eye of a viewer or to a display unit associated with a computer.
- the lens 510 is oriented so that images of body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g are transmitted through the fiber optic tube 408 g .
- a single light source 400 g and single lens 510 have been illustrated schematically in FIG. 20 , it should be understood that a plurality of light sources and/or a plurality of lenses may be mounted on the leading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g.
- the flexible tracheal tube 38 g may be utilized in association with the positioning apparatus 56 of FIGS. 1 and 2 or with the positioning apparatus 256 of FIG. 4 .
- the tracheal tube 38 g may be utilized by itself, that is without a positioning apparatus. If the tracheal tube 38 g is utilized with a positioning apparatus similar to the positioning apparatus 56 or 256 , the tracheal tube may be moved along a guide rod similar to the guide rod 50 or the guide rod 250 as the tracheal tube is moved into a patient's respiratory system. However, the tracheal tube may be moved along a guide rod into a patient's respiratory system without utilizing a positioning apparatus, similar to the positioning apparatus 56 or 256 of FIGS. 1 and 4 .
- the tracheal tube 38 g may be moved along an insertion path into a patient's respiratory system without benefit of a guide rod.
- a steering apparatus corresponding to the steering apparatus 460 and 460 f of FIG. 17-19 , may be associated with the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 38 g .
- expandable elements corresponding to the expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 of FIG. 18 may be connected with the leading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g .
- the expandable elements connected with the leading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g may be connected in fluid communication with a source of fluid under pressure through conduits disposed in the side wall of the tracheal tube.
- images of patient's body tissue are transmitted from the leading end portion of the tracheal tube for viewing by an operator who is inserting the tracheal tube into the respiratory system of a patient.
- the tracheal tube is associated with a sensor assembly having the same construction as the sensor assembly 420 of FIGS. 13 and 14 . Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIG. 21 is generally similar to the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 13 , 14 and 20 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “h” being associated with the numerals of FIG. 21 to avoid confusion.
- a tracheal tube 38 h ( FIG. 21 ) has a leading end portion 500 h .
- a detector portion 426 h is provided on the leading end portion 500 h of the tracheal tube 38 h .
- the detector portion 426 h cooperates with an emitter portion of a sensor assembly having the same construction as the emitter portion 424 ( FIG. 14 ) of the sensor assembly 420 .
- the tracheal tube 38 h includes a plurality of magnetic flux sensor units 440 h which respond to variations in a magnetic flux field in which the sensor units are exposed.
- the sensor units 440 h are Hall effect devices.
- the sensor units 440 h could be other known types of devices which respond to a magnetic flux field
- the sensors 440 h are connected with a computer, similar to the computer 438 of FIG. 13 , by a plurality of leads 442 h .
- the computer to which the leads 442 h are connected has a display unit which displays an image of a typical respiratory system. The display indicates the position of the leading end portion 500 h of the tracheal tube 38 h relative to the patient's respiratory system
- the computer display may also indicate the position of a guide rod, corresponding to the guide rod 50 c of FIG. 13 , relative to the patient's respiratory system. Therefore, the computer display shows the position of the leading end portion 500 h of the tracheal tube 38 h relative to the leading end portion 52 c ( FIG. 13 ) of the guide rod 50 c .
- the tracheal tube 38 h may advantageously be utilized in association with a guide rod, similar to the guide rod 50 c , it is contemplated that the tracheal tube 50 h could be utilized by itself without an associated guide rod.
- the output from the computer would indicated the position of the leading end portion 50 h of the tracheal tube 38 h relative to the patient's respiratory system and would not indicate the location of the guide rod.
- a steering apparatus similar to the steering apparatus 460 of FIG. 17 may be utilized with the tracheal tube 38 h ( FIG. 21 ).
- a plurality of expandable elements corresponding to the expandable elements 464 , 466 and 468 of FIG. 18 , would be connected with the leading end portion 50 h of the tracheal tube 38 h .
- the cooperation between the Hall effect devices forming the sensor units 440 h and the magnets of an associated detector portion of a sensor assembly would enable an operator inserting the tracheal tube 38 h into a patient's respiratory system to determine when one or more of the expandable elements should be expanded to steer the leading end portion 500 h of the tracheal tube 38 h.
- a light source 490 and steering apparatus 460 f is associated with the leading end portion 52 f of a guide rod 50 f .
- a plurality of light sources and a steering apparatus are associated with the leading end portion of a tracheal tube. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIG. 22 is generally similar to the embodiments of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 19-21 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “j” being associated with the numerals of FIG. 22 to avoid confusion.
- a tracheal tube 38 j has a leading end portion 500 j .
- a plurality of light sources 490 j are mounted on the leading end portion 500 j of the tracheal tube 38 j .
- the light sources 490 j are energized by electrical energy connected over leads 492 j .
- the light sources 490 j have been indicated schematically in FIG. 22 as being incandescent light sources, it is contemplated that solid state devices, such as light emitting diodes, could be utilized as the light sources if desired.
- the steering apparatus 460 j is mounted on the leading end portion 500 j of the tracheal tube 38 j .
- the steering apparatus 460 j includes a plurality of expandable elements 464 j and 466 j . Although only two expandable elements 464 j and 466 j have been illustrated schematically in FIG. 22 , it should be understood that there are three expandable elements connected with the leading end portion 500 j of the tracheal tube 38 j .
- the expandable elements are disposed in an array around the end of the tracheal tube in much the same manner as illustrated schematically in FIG. 18 in association with the guide rod 50 e
- the expandable elements 464 j and 466 j are connected with conduits 472 j and 474 j .
- the conduits 472 j and 474 j are formed in the side wall of the tracheal tube 38 j in the manner indicated schematically in FIG. 22 .
- a third conduit is provided to conduct fluid to and from a third expandable element on the end portion 500 j of the tracheal tube 38 j .
- the conduits 472 j and 474 j could be formed separately from the tracheal tube 38 j if desired.
- one or more of the expandable elements in the steering apparatus 460 j is inflated under the influence of fluid pressure conducted through an associated conduit.
- fluid pressure is connected through the conduit 472 j .
- the expandable element 464 j expands, forces are applied against tissue in the patient's respiratory system by the expandable element 464 j .
- the expandable element 464 j is effective to apply force against the leading end portion 500 j of the tracheal tube 38 j to deflect the tracheal tube downward (as viewed in FIG. 22
- the tracheal tube 38 j may be utilized in association with a guide rod, such as the guide rod 50 f of FIG. 19 or the guide rod 50 of FIG. 1 .
- a guide rod such as the guide rod 50 f of FIG. 19 or the guide rod 50 of FIG. 1 .
- the tracheal tube 38 j could be inserted into a patient's respiratory system without the benefit of a guide rod.
- the light sources 490 j are energized. Energization of the light sources 490 j results in the emission of light which can be detected by photo cells or similar devices positioned adjacent to the outside of the patient's neck. If desired, the photo cells could be eliminated and an operator could visually locate the leading end portion 50 j of the tracheal tube 38 j by viewing the illumination conducted through the patient's body tissues to the surface of the patient's neck. It is contemplated that an operator will, in all probability, locate the leading end portion 500 j of the tracheal tube 38 j by a combination of the output from photo detectors and visually viewing the patient's neck. If desired, the light sources 490 can be pulsed to provide a variation in the illumination from the light sources to facilitate visual locating of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 38 j by an operator
- the conduits 472 j and 474 j may be exhausted to atmosphere. It is believed that it may be preferred to connect the conduits 472 j and 474 j with a source of low pressure or suction so that fluid is drawn out of the expandable elements.
- the natural resilience of the expandable elements causes them to contract tightly against the leading end portion 500 j of the tracheal tube 38 j .
- a plurality of recesses may be provided in the leading end portion 500 j of the tracheal tube 38 j to receive the expandable elements 464 j and 466 j .
- additional expandable elements are associated with the leading end portion 500 j of the tracheal tube 38 j , additional recesses would be provided to receive these expandable elements when they are contracted.
- FIGS. 20 , 21 and 22 Various types of emitters and detectors have been illustrated in FIGS. 20 , 21 and 22 in association with the tracheal tube 38 j . It should be understood that any of the emitters or detector systems previously described in association with a guide rod may be utilized in association with a tracheal tube.
- a radio frequency transmitter and a receiver may be utilized as the emitter portion and the sensor portion of a sensor assembly which is utilized to detect the location of the leading end portion of a tracheal tube relative to a patient's respiratory system.
- the general mode operation of the positioning apparatus 56 of FIG. 1 is illustrated schematically in FIG. 23 .
- the positioning apparatus 56 includes an arcuate member 108 .
- the arcuate member 108 has a center of curvature indicated at 600 in FIG. 23 .
- the body section 86 of the positioning apparatus 56 has a central axis which extends through the center 600 .
- the positioning section 96 is connected with an end of the body section 86 which is disposed closest to the center 600 of curvature of the arcuate member 108 .
- the indicia 124 ( FIG. 1 ) on the body section 86 is effective to indicate the length of the body section 86 .
- the guide rod 50 also has a central axis which extends through the center 600 of curvature of the arcuate section 108 .
- the indicia 142 ( FIG. 1 ) on the guide rod 50 indicates the distance from the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod 50 from the arcuate member 108 .
- the guide rod 50 and body section 86 of the positioning apparatus 56 are both radiuses from the center 600 of curvature of the arcuate member.
- the positioning apparatus 96 is accurately located relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 ( FIG. 1 ) by engagement with the patient's Adam's apple 34 , the position of the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod relative to the patient's larynx 30 is known when the leading end portion 52 of the guide rod 50 is aligned with positioning apparatus 96 .
- FIG. 24 An alternative embodiment of the positioning apparatus 56 is illustrated in FIG. 24 . Since the embodiment of the positioning apparatus illustrated in FIG. 24 is generally similar to the embodiment of the positioning apparatus 56 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 23 , similar numerals will be utilized to indicate similar components, the suffix letter “k” being associated with the components of FIG. 24 to avoid confusion.
- a positioning apparatus 56 k includes a body section 86 k .
- a positioning section 96 k is connected with an end portion of the body section 86 k .
- the positioning section 96 k engages the patient's Adam's apple, in the manner previously described in conjunction with the apparatus 56 of FIG. 1 .
- a member 108 k is fixedly connected with the body section 86 and extends at a known angle, indicated at 604 in FIG. 24 .
- a guide section 114 k is disposed at an end of the member 108 k opposite from the connection 606 with the body section 86 k .
- the guide rod section 114 k guides movement of a guide rod 50 k along a path which extends through a center 600 k.
- the center 600 k is disposed at the intersection of a longitudinal central axis of the body section 86 k and a longitudinal central axis of the guide rod 50 k .
- An angle, indicated at 610 in FIG. 24 formed between the longitudinal central axis of the body section 86 k and the guide rod 50 k is known.
- the distance from the positioning section 96 k to the connection 606 between the body section 86 k and member 108 k is known.
- the angles 604 and 610 are known.
- the length of the member 108 is also known. Therefore the distance which the guide rod 50 k must extend from the guide section 114 k to have the leading end portion 52 k of the guide rod aligned with the positioning section 96 k can readily be determined by trigonometric functions.
- the positioning apparatus 256 of FIGS. 4-10 could have the same construction as the positioning apparatus 56 of FIGS. 1-3 .
- the magnet 260 of FIG. 4 could be used with the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 1-3 .
- the sensor assemblies 420 could be used with either the positioning apparatus 56 of FIG. 1 or the positioning apparatus 256 of FIGS. 4-10 .
- Other combinations of features of the invention will undoubtedly be utilized.
- the positioning apparatus 56 has a positioning section 96 which engages the patient's Adam's apple 34 .
- the positioning apparatus engages a plurality of locations on the patient's neck. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 25 and 26 is generally similar to the embodiments of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 1-24 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “m” being associated with the numerals of FIGS. 25 and 26 to avoid confusion.
- a positioning apparatus 56 m is utilized to position a guide rod 50 m corresponding to the guide rod 50 of FIG. 1 , relative to a patient's trachea 28 m during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea.
- the positioning apparatus 56 m provides an indication of the distance which the guide rod 50 m is to be moved into the patient's trachea 28 m .
- the positioning apparatus 56 m includes a base section 78 m which is connected with an arcuate upper section, corresponding to the arcuate upper section 80 of FIG. 1 .
- the base section 78 m includes a tubular cylindrical body section 86 b .
- the base section 78 m also includes a positioning section 96 m .
- the positioning section 96 m locates the positioning apparatus 56 m relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 m.
- the positioning section 96 includes a pair of positioning fingers 622 and 624 which engage the neck 16 m of the patient at locations disposed on laterally opposite sides of the Adam's apple 34 m .
- the positioning finger 622 is provided with a relatively soft resilient spherical end portion 628 which is pressed against the patient's neck 16 m at a location adjacent to the left (as viewed in FIG. 26 ) side of the patient's Adam's apple.
- the positioning finger 624 has a soft resilient spherical end portion 630 which is pressed against the patient's neck 16 m at a location adjacent to the right (as viewed in FIG.
- the positioning fingers 622 and 624 cooperate with the patient's Adam's apple 34 m to locate the positioning section 96 m laterally relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 m.
- the positioning section is provided with a straight center positioning finger 634 which is formed as a continuation of the tubular cylindrical body section 86 m of the positioning apparatus 56 m .
- the body section 86 m and center positioning finger 634 are integrally formed as one piece.
- the center positioning finger 634 has a soft resilient spherical end portion 636 which is pressed against the patient's Adam's apple 34 m at the center of the patient's Adam's apple.
- Force may be applied against the body section 86 m of the positioning apparatus 56 m and transmitted to the patient's neck 16 m to straighten the trachea of the patient.
- a slight bend in the trachea can be minimized by the manual application of a relatively small force to the positioning apparatus 56 m .
- This force is transmitted through the end portions 628 and 630 of the positioning fingers 622 and 624 to the patient's neck to straighten the patient's neck.
- a portion of the force will be transmitted through the center positioning finger 634 directly to the patient's Adam's apple 34 m.
- the position of the end portions 628 and 630 of the positioning fingers 622 and 624 relative to the body section 86 m of the base section 78 m of the positioning apparatus 56 m can be varied.
- the positioning fingers 622 and 624 are fixedly connected to a slide block 640 which is axially movable along the body section 86 m .
- the body section 86 m extends through a cylindrical central opening in the slide block 640 .
- a set screw 642 ( FIG. 25 ) having manually engagable wings or flanges can be tightened to hold the positioning fingers 622 and 624 in a desired position relative to the body section 86 m of the positioning apparatus 56 m .
- a relatively small amount of force can be transmitted through the center finger 634 directly to the patient's Adam's apple 34 m and substantially larger forces can be transmitted through the positioning fingers 622 and 624 to the patient's neck 16 m to locations disposed on opposite sides of the patient's Adam's apple 34 m.
- the positioning section 96 m of FIGS. 25 and 26 can be utilized in any of the positioning apparatus disclosed in FIGS. 1 through 24 herein.
- the emitter units 430 FIG. 14
- the sensor units 440 may be disposed adjacent to and connected with the end portions 628 , 630 and 636 ( FIG. 25 ) of the positioning fingers 622 , 624 and 634 .
- the positioning apparatus 56 m may be associated with guide rods having the construction of the guide rod 50 of FIG. 1 , the guide rod 250 of FIGS. 4 and 8 , the guide rod 50 e of FIGS. 17 and 18 , or the guide rod 50 f of FIG. 19 . It should also be understood that the positioning apparatus 56 m may be associated with a tracheal tube having the construction of any one of the tracheal tubes 38 ( FIG. 2 ), 238 ( FIGS. 9 and 10 ), 38 g ( FIG. 20 ), 38 h ( FIG. 21 ), or 38 j ( FIG. 22 ).
- the positioning fingers 622 and 624 are fixedly connected with the body section 86 m of the positioning apparatus 56 m by the slide block 640 while the positioning fingers 634 is integrally formed as one piece with the body section 36 m .
- the positioning fingers are movable relative to the body section of the positioning apparatus. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 27 and 28 is generally similar to the embodiments of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 1-26 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “r” being associated with the numerals of FIGS. 27 and 28 to avoid confusion.
- a positioning apparatus 56 r positions a guide rod, corresponding to the guide rod 50 of FIG. 1 , relative to a patient's trachea during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea.
- the positioning apparatus 56 r provides an indication of the distance which the guide rod is to be moved into the patient's trachea. Although only a portion of the positioning apparatus 56 r is illustrated in FIGS. 27 and 28 , it should be understood that the positioning apparatus may have the same general construction as the positioning apparatus of any one of the embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 1-19 .
- the positioning apparatus 56 r includes a base section 78 r which is connected with an arcuate upper section corresponding to the arcuate upper section 80 of FIG. 1 .
- the upper section of the positioning apparatus 56 r guides movement of a guide rod, corresponding to the guide rod 50 of FIG. 1 , during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea.
- a positioning section 96 r is connected with the base section 78 r .
- the positioning section 96 r locates the positioning apparatus 56 r relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 r ( FIG. 28 ).
- the positioning section 96 r is connected with an end of a body section 86 r of the positioning apparatus 56 r by a universal pivot connection 652 .
- the pivot connection 652 allows the orientation of the base section 78 r of the positioning apparatus 56 r to be changed in any direction relative to the positioning section 96 r .
- the body section 86 r of the positioning apparatus 56 r can be raised or lowered (as viewed in FIG. 27 ) or pivoted to the left or right (as viewed in FIG. 28
- the positioning section 96 r includes a plurality of positioning fingers 622 r , 624 r and 634 r .
- the positioning fingers 622 r , 624 r and 634 r are provided with soft resilient spherical end portions 628 r , 630 r , and 636 r .
- the positioning section 96 r may be located in any one of many different orientations relative to the patient's Adam's apple 34 r
- the position section 96 r is illustrated in FIG. 28 with the end portions 628 r and 630 r disposed on laterally opposite sides of the patient's Adam's apple 34 r .
- the end portion 636 r is disposed adjacent to the lower end portion of the patient's Adam's apple 34 r .
- the orientation of the positioning section 96 r could be rotated by 180 degrees from the orientation illustrated in FIG. 28 . If this was done, the end portion 636 r on the positioning finger 634 r would be disposed adjacent to the upper portion of the patient's Adam's apple 34 r . It is believed that it will probably be preferred to align the pivot connection 652 with the center of the patient's Adam's apple 34 r . However, if desired, the pivot connection 652 could be offset from the center of the patient's Adam's apple 34 .
- the positioning sections 96 m and 96 r have been illustrated as having three positioning fingers. However, it is contemplated that the positioning sections could have either a greater number of positioning fingers or a lesser number of positioning fingers if desired.
- the center positioning finger 634 of the embodiment of the invention illustrated in FIGS. 25 and 26 could be omitted. If this was done, the positioning finger 622 would be positioned on one side of the patient's Adam's apple 34 m and the positioning finger 624 would be positioned on the laterally opposite side of the patient's Adam's apple, in the manner illustrated in FIG. 26 , without engaging the central portion of the patient's Adam's apple.
- the positioning section 96 m or 96 r could be provided with four positioning fingers. If this was done, two of the positioning fingers would be positioned in engagement with the neck of the patient adjacent to one side of the patient's Adam's apple and the other two positioning fingers would be positioned in engagement with the patient's neck on a laterally opposite side of the patient's Adam's apple.
- An improved method and apparatus for use in tracheal intubination or other medical procedures may include a positioning apparatus 56 , 256 .
- the positioning apparatus 56 , 256 is used for tracheal intubination, the positioning apparatus is located relative to a patient's trachea 28 , 228 by engaging a portion of the patient's body, such as the Adam's apple 34 , 234 .
- a flexible guide rod 50 , 250 may be moved relative to the positioning apparatus until a leading end portion 52 , 252 of the guide rod has moved into the patient's trachea.
- a tracheal tube 38 , 238 is slid along the guide rod into the patient's trachea.
- the guide rod may be moved through either a tubular guide member 264 or a tracheal tube 38 , 238 which extends through the patient's mouth into the patient's pharynx.
- the distance which the guide rod is to be moved may advantageously determined. This may be done as a function of spacing between locations on the positioning apparatus 56 , 256 .
- indicia 124 , 324 may be provided on the positioning apparatus 56 , 256 and cooperating indicia 142 , 342 - 350 may be provided on the guide rod 50 , 250 .
- a magnet 260 may be utilized to attract a leading end portion 252 of the guide rod 250 .
- the magnet 260 is disposed outside of the patient's body and may be positioned adjacent to an anterior side of the trachea. Magnetic attraction between the magnet 260 and the leading end portion 252 of the guide rod deflects the guide rod. This steers the leading end portion of the guide rod 250 into the entrance to the patient's trachea.
- a magnet may be used to steer a member relative to a patient's body tissue during performance of operations other than tracheal intubination
- an image of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube may be transmitted to a location outside of the patient's body ( FIGS. 12 and 20 ). Movement of the guide rod 50 , 250 and/or tracheal tube 38 , 238 into the patient's trachea is interrupted when the image transmitted from the leading end portion of the guide rod or tracheal tube indicates that the leading end portion of the guide rod or tracheal tube has been moved to a desired position relative to the patient's trachea.
- transmission of an image of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 38 , 238 may advantageously be performed when the tracheal tube is utilized without benefit of the positioning apparatus 56 , 256 .
- the transmission of an image of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 38 , 238 may be performed when the positioning apparatus is used in association with the tracheal tube.
- Positioning of the guide rod 50 , 250 relative to the patient's trachea may also be facilitated by the transmitting of images of body tissue adjacent to a leading end portion of the guide rod.
- Detectors and emitters 424 , 426 may be utilized to detect the position of the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 , 250 and/or the tracheal tube 38 , 238 relative to the patient's trachea.
- an emitter 424 such as a magnet or a light source, may be connected with a leading end portion 52 , 252 of the guide rod 50 , 250 and/or the tracheal tube 38 , 238 .
- One or more detectors 426 may be provided on the outside of the patient's neck to detect the output from the emitter 424 when the guide rod 50 , 250 and/or the tracheal tube 38 , 238 are in a desired position relative to the patient's trachea.
- a detector 426 may be connected with the leading end portion of a guide rod 50 , 250 and/or tracheal tube 38 , 238 and one or more emitters 424 positioned relative to the outside of the patient's neck. The detector 426 would provide an output indicating when the guide rod 50 , 250 and/or tracheal tube 38 , 238 is moved to a desired position relative to the patient's trachea.
- force may be applied against the leading end portion 52 , 252 of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube to steer the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube.
- the application of force against the leading end portion 52 , 252 of the guide rod 50 , 250 and/or tracheal tube 38 , 238 may be accomplished by expanding an expandable element 464 - 468 connected with the guide rod 50 , 250 and/or the tracheal tube 38 , 238 .
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Surgery (AREA)
- Pulmonology (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Medical Informatics (AREA)
- Pathology (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Anesthesiology (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Emergency Medicine (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Otolaryngology (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- Media Introduction/Drainage Providing Device (AREA)
- Endoscopes (AREA)
Abstract
A tracheal tube positioning apparatus is located relative to a patient's trachea by engaging the patient's Adam's apple. Indicia on relatively movable sections of the positioning apparatus provides an indication of the distance between the patient's mouth and the patient's larynx. A flexible guide rod is moved through a distance corresponding to the distance between the patient's mouth and larynx, as determined by the positioning apparatus. A magnet is utilized to attract a leading end portion of the guide rod. A plurality of emitters may be disposed in an array around the patient's Adam's apple. Outputs from the emitters are detected by a detector connected with the guide rod and by a detector connected with the tracheal tube. Alternatively, a plurality of detectors may be disposed in an array around the patient's Adam's apple to detect the output from an emitter connected with the guide rod and by an emitter connected with the tracheal tube. Expandable elements may be connected with the guide rod and/or tracheal tube to steer movement along an insertion path.
Description
- This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/990,870, filed Nov. 17, 2004, which in turn is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/728,553, filed on Dec. 2, 2000, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,820,614, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference.
- The present invention relates to a new and improved method and apparatus for use in tracheal intubination or other medical procedures
- Tracheal intubination has previously been utilized to provide an unobstructed air passage to a patient's lungs. Tracheal intubination is frequently done under emergency circumstances which are not optimal. It has previously been recognized that is necessary to have a tracheal tube bend around the patient's epiglottis and move from the patient's pharynx into the larynx at the upper end of the patient's trachea rather than into the patient's esophagus. However, it is difficult for a person inserting the tracheal tube to know where the leading end portion of the tracheal tube is located relative to the patient's larynx.
- Various methods and devices for assisting in tracheal intubination are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,832,020; 4,865,586; 4,913,139; 5,353,787; 5,235,970; 5,560,351; and 5,694,929.
- An improved method and apparatus for use in tracheal intubination or other medical procedure may include a positioning apparatus. When the positioning apparatus is used for tracheal intubination, the positioning apparatus is located relative to a patient's trachea by engaging a portion of the patient's body, such as the Adam's apple. A flexible guide rod may be moved relative to the positioning apparatus until a leading end portion of the guide rod has moved into the patient's trachea. A tracheal tube is slid along the guide rod into the patient's trachea.
- During movement of the guide rod relative to the positioning apparatus, the guide rod may be moved through either a tubular guide member or a tracheal tube which extends through the patient's mouth into the patient's pharynx. Before beginning to move the guide rod, the distance which the guide rod is to be moved may advantageously determined. This may be done as a function of spacing between locations on the positioning apparatus. If desired, indicia may be provided on the positioning apparatus and cooperating indicia may be provided on the guide rod.
- A magnet may be utilized to attract a leading end portion of the guide rod. The magnet is disposed outside of the patient's body and may be positioned adjacent to an anterior side of the trachea. Magnetic attraction between the magnet and the leading end portion of the guide rod deflects the guide rod. This steers the leading end portion of the guide rod into the entrance to the patient's trachea. A magnet may be used to steer a member relative to a patient's body tissue during performance of operations other than tracheal intubination.
- In order to locate the guide rod and/or tracheal tube relative to the patient's trachea, an image of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube may be transmitted to a location outside of the patient's body. Movement of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube into the patient's trachea is interrupted when the image transmitted from the leading end portion of the guide rod or tracheal tube indicates that the leading end portion of the guide rod or tracheal tube has been moved to a desired position relative to the patient's trachea.
- It is believed that transmission of an image of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube may advantageously be performed when the tracheal tube is utilized without benefit of the positioning apparatus. However, the transmission of an image of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube may be performed when the positioning apparatus is used in association with the tracheal tube. Positioning of the guide rod relative to the patient's trachea may also be facilitated by the transmitting of images of body tissue adjacent to a leading end portion of the guide rod.
- Detectors and emitters may be utilized to detect the position of the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or the tracheal tube relative to the patient's trachea. When this is done, an emitter, such as a magnet or a light source, may be connected with a leading end portion of the guide rod and/or the tracheal tube. One or more detectors may be provided on the outside of the patient's neck to detect the output from the emitter when the guide rod and/or the tracheal tube are in a desired position relative to the patient's trachea. Alternatively, a detector may be connected with the leading end portion of a guide rod and/or tracheal tube and one or more emitters positioned relative to the outside of the patient's neck. The detector would provide an output indicating when the guide rod and/or tracheal tube is moved to a desired position relative to the patient's trachea.
- During movement of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube along the patient's respiratory system and into the patient's trachea, force may be applied against the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube to steer the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube. The application of force against the leading end portion of the guide rod and/or tracheal tube may be accomplished by expanding an expandable element connected with the guide rod and/or the tracheal tube.
- It should be understood that any one of the features of the present invention may be used separately or in combination with other features of the invention. It's believed that various combinations of the features, other than those disclosed herein, may advantageously be utilized and will be apparent to those skilled in the art from the description contained herein. In addition, it should be understood that features of the present invention may be used for purposes other than tracheal intubination.
- The foregoing and other features of the present invention will become more apparent upon a consideration of the following description taken in connection with the accompanying drawings wherein:
-
FIG. 1 is a fragmentary schematic illustration depicting the use of a positioning apparatus to position a guide rod relative to the mouth and trachea of a patient; -
FIG. 2 a fragmentary schematic illustration depicting the manner in which a tracheal tube is moved along the guide rod ofFIG. 1 into the trachea of the patient; -
FIG. 3 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, similar toFIG. 1 , illustrating the manner in which a laryngoscope may be combined with the positioning apparatus; -
FIG. 4 is a fragmentary schematic illustration depicting the use of another embodiment of the positioning apparatus to position a guide rod relative to the mouth and trachea of a patient; -
FIG. 5 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of a portion of the apparatus ofFIG. 4 and illustrating the relationship between a guide rod and a guide tube; -
FIG. 6 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of a portion of the apparatus ofFIG. 4 and illustrating the relationship between the guide tube, guide rod, and a guide member in the positioning apparatus; -
FIG. 7 is a schematic fragmentary sectional view illustrating a manner in which the positioning apparatus engages a patient's Adam's apple and the manner in which a magnet is moved along the outside of the neck of the patient; -
FIG. 8 (on sheet 3 of the drawings) is an enlarged fragmentary schematic illustration of indicia on a portion of the guide rod ofFIG. 4 ; -
FIG. 9 is a fragmentary schematic illustration of the guide rod with the positioning apparatus and guide tube ofFIG. 4 removed after positioning of the guide rod relative to the patient's trachea; -
FIG. 10 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, generally similar toFIG. 9 , illustrating the manner in which a tracheal tube is moved along the guide rod into the patient's trachea; -
FIG. 11 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, generally similar toFIG. 4 , illustrating an embodiment of the apparatus in which the tracheal tube is used to guide movement of the guide rod; -
FIG. 12 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, similar toFIG. 1 , illustrating an embodiment of the positioning apparatus which transmits an image of body tissue adjacent to a leading end portion of the guide rod; -
FIG. 13 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, generally similar toFIGS. 1 and 12 , of an embodiment of the invention in which a detector on a leading end portion of a guide rod detects emitters disposed on the neck of the patient; -
FIG. 14 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, depicting the manner in which a plurality of emitters are arranged in an array around the Adams's apple of the patient ofFIG. 13 ; -
FIG. 15 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, generally similar toFIG. 13 , of an embodiment of the invention in which detectors on the neck of the patient detect an emitter on a leading end portion of the guide rod; -
FIG. 16 is a fragmentary schematic illustration, generally similar toFIG. 14 , illustrating a manner in which a plurality of detectors are positioned in an array around the Adam's apple on the neck of the patient ofFIG. 15 ; -
FIG. 17 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of the leading end portion of a guide rod on which a detector and a plurality of expandable steering elements are disposed; -
FIG. 18 is a plan view, taken generally along the line 18-18 ofFIG. 17 , further illustrating the relationship of the expandable steering elements to the leading end portion of the guide rod; -
FIG. 19 is a schematic fragmentary sectional view of a leading end portion of a guide rod on which an emitter and a plurality of expandable steering elements are disposed; -
FIG. 20 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of a leading end portion of a tracheal tube and illustrating the manner in which a light source and light conductor are disposed on the tracheal tube to facilitate visualization of tissue disposed adjacent to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube; -
FIG. 21 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of a leading end portion of a tracheal tube and illustrating a plurality of detectors which are disposed on the leading end portion of tracheal tube; -
FIG. 22 is an enlarged schematic fragmentary sectional view of a leading end portion of a tracheal tube illustrating the manner in which a plurality of emitters and expandable steering elements are mounted on the leading end portion of the tracheal tube; -
FIG. 23 is a schematic illustration depicting the positioning apparatus ofFIGS. 1 and 2 ; -
FIG. 24 is a schematic illustration, generally similar toFIG. 23 , illustrating another embodiment of the apparatus ofFIGS. 1 and 2 ; -
FIG. 25 is a fragmentary schematic illustration of a portion of a positioning apparatus having another embodiment of the positioning section; -
FIG. 26 is a fragmentary schematic illustration depicting the relationship between the positioning section ofFIG. 25 and a patient's Adam's apple during use of the positioning apparatus; -
FIG. 27 is a fragmentary schematic illustration of a portion of a positioning apparatus having another embodiment of the positioning section; and -
FIG. 28 is a fragmentary schematic illustration depicting the relationship between the positioning section ofFIG. 27 and a patient's Adam's apple during use of the positioning apparatus. - The present invention relates to a new and improved method and apparatus for use in tracheal intubination or other medical procedures. A portion of a patient's
head 10 andrespiratory system 11 has been illustrated schematically inFIG. 1 . The schematicized illustration of the patient'shead 10 andrespiratory system 11 includes amouth 12 which is connected with athroat 14 in aneck 16 of the patient. - A pharynx extends downward from a nasal cavity in the
head 10 of the patient. The pharynx is connected with anesophagus 26 and atrachea 28 in theneck 16 of the patient. Theesophagus 26 extends from the pharynx to the stomach of the patient. Thetrachea 28 extends from the pharynx to the bronchial tubes and lungs of the patient. - The trachea 28 (
FIG. 1 ) has anupper end portion 30 which is referred to as the larynx. Vocal cords or folds 32 have been indicated schematically inFIG. 1 and are disposed in thelarynx 30. Thevocal cords 32 are adjacent to the Adam'sapple 34 of the patient. The Adam'sapple 34 is a laryngeal prominence formed by lamina of cartilage in the larynx. - Opening of a passage for air from the patient's mouth to the patient's lungs may require insertion of a flexible tracheal tube 38 (
FIG. 2 ). Movement of the flexibletracheal tube 38 from the patient'smouth 12 into the pharynx of the patient is relatively easily accomplished. However, directing thetracheal tube 38 into the patient'strachea 28 may present difficulties. This is because the tracheal tube must extend past the epiglottis into thelarynx 30 at the upper end of thetrachea 28. Thetracheal tube 38 must not enter theesophagus 26 rather than thetrachea 28. During movement of the leading end of thetracheal tube 38 through thelarynx 30, it is desirable to have the tracheal tube near the central portion of the laryngeal cavity in order to minimize irritation of the vocal folds orcords 32 by the tracheal tube. - In accordance with one of the features of the present invention, a flexible guide wire or rod 50 (
FIG. 1 ) is utilized to guide movement of the flexible tracheal tube 38 (FIG. 2 ) into thetrachea 28. Theflexible guide rod 50 has a soft generally sphericalleading end portion 52. Theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50 is formed of a resiliently compressible material which is readily deflected by engagement with the vocal cords or folds 32 and by engagement with the surface of thetrachea 28. If desired, theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50 may be coated with a suitable lubricant to facilitate movement of the leading end portion between the vocal cords with minimum of irritation. - In accordance with another of the features of the invention, the
guide wire 50 is initially positioned relative to the patient'strachea 28 with a positioning apparatus 56 (FIG. 1 ). Thepositioning apparatus 56 engages the patient's Adam'sapple 34 to locate the positioning apparatus relative to thetrachea 28 of the patient. In addition, thepositioning apparatus 56 provides a measurement which is a function of the distance between the Adam'sapple 34 and themouth 12 of the patient. This measurement is utilized to determine the distance through which theguide rod 50 is to be moved relative to thepositioning apparatus 56 as the guide rod is inserted into thetrachea 28. - The
positioning apparatus 56 has been and will be described herein in association with tracheal intubination. However, it is contemplated that thepositioning apparatus 56 will be used in association with many other medical procedures where accurate positioning of an object relative to body tissue is desired. The positioning apparatus may be used in association with endoscopic, arthroscopic or fiber optic surgical procedures. It is believed that thepositioning apparatus 56 will be used in conjunction with medical procedures where it is necessary to position an object at a location in a patient's body where there is only limited access. - The
positioning apparatus 56 positions theguide rod 50 relative to the patient'strachea 28 during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea. In addition, thepositioning apparatus 56 provides an indication of the distance which the guide rod is to be moved into the patient's trachea. By using thepositioning apparatus 56, a person moving theguide rod 50 into the patient'strachea 28 can know where theleading end portion 52 of the guide rod is located relative to the trachea. - The
flexible guide rod 50 may be formed of either polymeric material or metal. The illustratedpolymeric guide rod 50 has a relatively small diameter and is readily deflected. Theguide rod 50 has a circular cross sectional configuration. - The
guide rod 50 is axially movable relative to thepositioning apparatus 56 under the influence of force manually applied to the portion of the guide rod disposed to the left (as viewed inFIG. 1 ) of thepositioning apparatus 56. This force results in axial movement of theguide rod 50 relative to thepositioning apparatus 56. In addition, the leadingend 52 of theguide rod 50 may deflect body tissue to clear a passage for theguide rod 50. - As the
guide rod 50 is moved axially relative to thepositioning apparatus 56, the guide rod may be resiliently deflected by engagement with the body tissue of the patient. As theguide rod 50 is manually pushed toward the right (as viewed inFIG. 1 ), the leadingend 52 of the guide rod moves toward thelarynx 30. - The
positioning apparatus 56 is used to locate theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50 as the guide rod moves toward thelarynx 30. Thepositioning apparatus 56 includes abase section 78 and an arcuate upper section 80 (FIG. 1 ). Thebase section 78 engages the patient's Adam'sapple 34 to locate thepositioning apparatus 56 relative to the patient'strachea 28. Theupper section 80 of thepositioning apparatus 56 guides movement of theguide rod 50 during insertion of the guide rod into the patient'strachea 28. - The
base section 78 andupper section 80 of thepositioning apparatus 56 cooperate to provide a measurement of the distance between the patient'smouth 12 and the patient's Adam'sapple 34. This distance will vary from patient to patient depending upon the size of the patient, the specific configuration of thehead 10 of the patient, and other factors. The distance which theguide rod 50 must be moved axially into the patient'slarynx 30 will vary as a function of variations in the distance between the patient'smouth 12 and the patient's Adam'sapple 34. This is because the patient's Adam'sapple 34 is located adjacent to the entrance to thetrachea 28. - The
positioning apparatus 56 can be used to position many different objects at desired locations in a patient's body. For example, theguide rod 50 or a similar member could be inserted into a patient's stomach or colon. Thebase section 78 of the positioning apparatus would be positioned in engagement with an exterior surface on the patient's body at a location where theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50 is to be moved. Theupper section 80 of thepositioning apparatus 56 would cooperate with thebase section 78 and guiderod 50 to provide a clear indication of the location of theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50 relative to the patient's body tissue, for example, the patient's stomach or colon. - The base section 78 (
FIG. 1 ) of thepositioning apparatus 56 includes a tubularcylindrical body section 86. Thebase section 78 also includes apositioning section 96 which engages the patient's Adam'sapple 34 and is supported by thebody section 86. Thepositioning section 96 engages the patient's Adam'sapple 34. Although the illustrated positioning section 96 (FIG. 1 ) engages only a single location on the patient'sneck 16, the positioning section could be constructed so as to engage a plurality of locations on the patient's neck. For example, it may be preferred to use apositioning section 96 having two positioning fingers disposed on laterally opposite sides of the Adam'sapple 34. - It is contemplated that the
positioning section 96 could have many different constructions. It is believed that it may be particularly advantageous to utilize apositioning section 96 having the construction illustrated inFIGS. 25 and 26 herein. Alternatively, thepositioning section 96 may have the construction illustrated inFIGS. 27 and 28 orFIGS. 4 and 7 herein if desired. - Force may be manually applied against the
positioning section 96 to straighten thetrachea 28 of the patient. Thus, the patient'strachea 28 may have a slight anterior bend when the patient'shead 10 is in the position illustrated inFIG. 1 . This slight bend can be eliminated by the manual application of minimal force to thepositioning section 96. This force presses thepositioning section 96 against the patient's neck. - Although it is preferred to use the patient's Adam's
apple 34 to locate thepositioning apparatus 56 relative to the patient'strachea 28, a different portion of the patient's body could be used to locate the positioning apparatus relative to the patient's trachea. For example, the patient's shoulders could be used. Alternatively, bones in the patient'sneck 16 could be used to locate thepositioning apparatus 56 relative to the patient'strachea 28. However, it is believed that it will be preferred to use the patient's Adam'sapple 34 to locate thepositioning apparatus 56 due to the close proximity of the patient's Adam's apple to the upper end of the patient'strachea 28. - The arcuate
upper section 80 of thepositioning apparatus 56 includes anarcuate member 108 which is slidably connected with thebody section 86 at aconnection 110. Theconnection 110 is movable axially along thecylindrical body section 86. Thebody section 86 is movable transversely to thearcuate member 108, in the manner indicated by thearrows 112 inFIG. 1 . Suitable indicia, indicated by lines inFIG. 1 , may be provided on thearcuate member 108 to indicate the position of theconnection 110 relative to the arcuate member. - The
connection 110 may include a plurality of set screws (not shown) having manually engagable flanges or arms. One of the set screws may be tightened to prevent movement between thebody section 86 and theconnection 110. Another set screw may be tightened to prevent movement between thearcuate member 108 and theconnection 110. - When the
connection 110 has been moved to a desired location along thebody section 86, a set screw in the connection is tightened to hold thearcuate member 108 against axial movement along to thecylindrical body section 86. Thearcuate member 108 is then moved transversely to thebody section 86, that is, in the direction of thearrows 112, to position aguide section 114 in alignment with the patient'smouth 12 andtrachea 28. When thetubular guide section 114 has been aligned with the patient'strachea 28, another set screw in theconnection 110 is tightened to hold thearcuate member 108 against transverse movement relative to thebody section 86. - The
guide rod 50 extends through a cylindrical passage in theguide section 114. Therefore, transverse movement of thearcuate member 108 relative to thebody section 86, that is, in the direction indicated by thearrows 112 positions theguide rod 50 in alignment with the patient'smouth 12. Theguide rod 50 is axially movable relative to theguide section 114 into the patient'smouth 12 andtrachea 28. - In the illustrated embodiment of the invention, the distance between the patient's Adam's
apple 34 and thearcuate member 108 is indicated by indicia 124 (FIG. 1 ). Theindicia 124 is disposed on thecylindrical body section 86 of thepositioning apparatus 56. The position of theconnection 110 relative to theindicia 124 indicates the distance which the arcuate member is spaced from thepositioning section 96. The distance which theconnection 110 is spaced from thepositioning section 96 is a function of the distance between the patient's Adam'sapple 34 and the entrance to the patient'smouth 12. - In the illustrated embodiment of the invention, the
indicia 124 is formed by a plurality ofcolored bands 130. Each of thebands 130 has a different color from the other bands. Each of thebands 130 has the same axial extent. However, the bands could have different axial extents if desired. Rather than using the coloredbands 130 as theindicia 124, numerical indicia could be provided. However, it is believed that it may be easier to read the differentcolored bands 130 than to read numerical indicia. -
Colored bands 142 are provided on theguide rod 50. Thecolored bands 142 have different colors which correspond to the colors of thebands 130 on thecylindrical body section 86 of thepositioning apparatus 56. Thecolored bands 142 on theguide rod 50 are spaced from theend portion 52 of the guide rod by the same distance which correspondingly coloredbands 130 on thebody section 86 are spaced from the center of the Adam'sapple 34. - The
bands 142 on theguide rod 50 cooperate with an end portion 156 (FIG. 1 ) of theguide section 114 to indicate when theleading end portion 52 of the guide rod is in a desired position relative to the patient'strachea 28. Thus, assuming that a redcolored band 130 on thecylindrical body section 86 of thepositioning apparatus 56 is aligned with theconnection 110, the red band on theguide rod 50 will be moved to a position in which it is adjacent to theguide section 114. When theguide rod 50 has been moved to a position in which the red band is adjacent to theguide section 114, theleading end portion 52 of the guide rod will have moved through a desired distance into the patient'strachea 28 and will be aligned with the patient's Adam'sapple 34. - When the
positioning apparatus 56 is to be associated with a different portion of a patient's body, theindicia 124 would be revised to correspond to the distance which theguide rod 50 is to be moved relative to thearcuate member 108 to bring theleading end portion 52 of the guide rod into alignment with thepositioning section 96 or to a position spaced a desired distance from the positioning section. It is contemplated that thepositioning apparatus 56 maybe used during endoscopic, arthroscopic, or fiber optic surgery at many locations in a patient's body, for example during surgery on joints in the patient's body. - The
positioning apparatus 56 may be used in association with the delivery of medicants to relatively inaccessible locations in a patient's body. For example, a medicant could be connected with theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50 and released when theindicia 124 indicated that the medicant has been moved to a desired position relative to thepositioning section 96. The medicant may be released by activating a holder, disposed at theleading end portion 52 of the guide rod. A Bowden cable or other actuator may extend through the guide rod to the medicant holder to operate the medicant holder from a closed condition to an open condition to release the medicant. - Once the
guide rod 50 has been moved through a desired distance into the patient'strachea 28, thepositioning apparatus 56 is separated from theguide rod 50 while the guide rod remains stationary relative to the patient's trachea. Thus, once theindicia 142 on theguide rod 50 indicates that theleading end portion 52 of the guide rod has been moved through a desired distance into the patient'strachea 28, axial movement of theguide rod 50 is interrupted. At this time, one of thecolored bands 142 on theguide rod 50 corresponding to the one of thecolored bands 130 aligned with theconnection 110, is aligned with theend surface 156 on theguide section 114 - The
guide section 114 is then slid axially outward, that is toward the left as viewed inFIG. 1 , along theguide rod 50. During this sliding movement of theguide section 114 along theguide rod 50, the guide rod is manually held against movement relative to the patient'smouth 12 andtrachea 28. Theupper section 80 andbase section 78 are separated from the patient during movement of theguide section 114 along theguide rod 50. As this occurs, theguide rod 50 is stationary relative to the patient. - Once the
upper section 80 has been separated from theguide rod 50, the tracheal tube 38 (FIG. 2 ) is slid along theguide rod 50 into the patient'strachea 28. Thus, the end of theguide rod 50 remote from the patient'smouth 12 andtrachea 28 is inserted into thetracheal tube 38. As this is done, theguide rod 50 is manually held against movement relative to the patient'smouth 12 andtrachea 28. Thetracheal tube 38 is then moved axially along theguide rod 50 while theleading end portion 52 of the guide rod remains stationary in the patient's trachea. - As the
tracheal tube 38 is moved axially along theguide rod 50, the guide rod directs the leading end portion of the tracheal tube into the patient'slarynx 30 and past thevocal cords 32. The leading end of thetracheal tube 38 is centered in the space between the vocal cords and the entrance to the patient's trachea by theguide rod 50. This minimizes irritation of the patient'svocal cords 32. Thetracheal tube 38 is moved along theguide rod 50 at least until the leading end of the tracheal tube engages theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50. - It is contemplated that it may be desired to move the
tracheal tube 38 further into the patient'strachea 28 than the distance which theguide rod 50 is moved into the patient's trachea. If this is the case, thetracheal tube 38 is pushed axially along theguide rod 50 past theleading end portion 52 of the guide rod. As this occurs, theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50 is compressed slightly and enters thetracheal tube 38. - Once the
tracheal tube 38 has been moved to a desired depth into the patient'strachea 28, theguide rod 50 is removed from the tracheal tube (FIG. 7 ). Thetracheal tube 38 then provides a passage for the conduction air, other gases, and/or medication to the patient's lungs - This contemplated that a laryngoscope 170 (
FIG. 3 ) maybe connected with theconnection 110 which interconnects thebody section 86 and arcuateupper section 80 of thepositioning apparatus 56. Thelaryngoscope 170 andbody section 86 are moveable relative to each other to enable the laryngoscope to be positioned in the patient'smouth 12. As thelaryngoscope 170 is inserted into the patient'smouth 12, the laryngoscope engages the patient's tongue. The laryngoscope then holds the patients tongue in a desired position in themouth 12 of the patient. - The
laryngoscope 170 is then inserted further into the patient'smouth 12 to expose progressively deeper structures within the oropharynx. Thelaryngoscope 170 could be advanced to facilitate visualization of the glottic opening in a known manner. Although the laryngoscope may be provided as part of thepositioning apparatus 56, in the manner illustrated inFIG. 3 , it is contemplated that thelaryngoscope 170 could be separate from the positioning apparatus if desired. Regardless of whether thelaryngoscope 170 is formed as part of thepositioning apparatus 56 or separate from the positioning apparatus, the laryngoscope is utilized in a known manner in management of the patient's tongue and airway. - A second embodiment of the invention is illustrated in
FIGS. 4 through 10 . Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 4-10 is generally similar to embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 1-3 , similar terminology will be utilized to refer to similar components. - A portion of a patient's
head 210 has been illustrated schematically inFIG. 4 . The patient's head includes amouth 212 which is connected with athroat 214 and aneck 216 of the patient. Although the patient'shead 210 has been schematically illustrated in an upright orientation inFIG. 4 , it should be understood that the patient's head could be in a different orientation if desired. For example, the patient'shead 210 could be in the orientation illustrated inFIGS. 1 and 2 for the patient'shead 10. - A
pharynx 220 extends downward from anasal cavity 222 in thehead 210 of the patient. Thepharynx 220 is connected with anesophagus 226 and atrachea 228 in theneck 216 of the patient. Theesophagus 226 extends from thepharynx 220 to the stomach of the patient. Thetrachea 228 extends from the pharynx to the bronchial tubes and lungs of the patient. - The trachea 228 (
FIG. 4 ) has anupper end portion 230 which is referred to as the larynx. Vocal cords or folds 232 have been indicated schematically inFIG. 3 and are disposed in thelarynx 230. Thevocal cords 232 are adjacent to the Adam'sapple 234 of the patient. The Adam'sapple 234 is a laryngeal prominence formed by lamina of cartilage in the larynx. - Opening of a passage for air from the patient's mouth to the patient's lungs may require insertion of a flexible tracheal tube 238 (
FIG. 10 ). Movement of the flexibletracheal tube 238 from the patient'smouth 212 into thepharynx 220 of the patient is relatively easily accomplished. However, directing thetracheal tube 238 into the patient'strachea 228 may present difficulties. This is because ananterior bend 240 must be formed in thetracheal tube 238. Theanterior bend 240 extends around theepiglottis 242 into thelarynx 230 at the upper end of thetrachea 228. Theanterior bend 240 can be minimized by placing the patient in the orientation illustrated inFIGS. 1 and 2 . - During movement of the leading end of the
tracheal tube 238 through thelarynx 230, it is desirable to have the tracheal tube near the central portion of the laryngeal cavity in order to minimize irritation of the vocal folds orcords 232 by the tracheal tube. In accordance with a feature of the present invention, a flexible guide wire or rod 250 (FIGS. 4 and 9 ) is utilized to guide movement of the flexible tracheal tube 238 (FIGS. 9 and 10 ) into thetrachea 228. The flexible guide rod 250 (FIG. 9 ) has a soft generally sphericalleading end portion 252. Theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 is formed of a resiliently compressible material which is readily deflected by engagement with the vocal cords or folds 232 and by engagement with the surface of thetrachea 228. If desired, theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 may be coated with a suitable lubricant to facilitate movement of the leading end portion between the vocal cords with minimum of irritation. - In accordance with another feature of the invention, the
guide wire 250 is initially positioned relative to the patient'strachea 228 with a positioning apparatus 256 (FIG. 4 ). Thepositioning apparatus 256 engages the patient's Adam'sapple 234 to locate the positioning apparatus relative to thetrachea 228 of the patient. In addition, thepositioning apparatus 256 provides a measurement which is a function of the distance between the Adam'sapple 234 and themouth 212 of the patient. This measurement is utilized to determine the distance through which theguide rod 250 is to be moved relative to thepositioning apparatus 256 as the guide rod is inserted into thetrachea 228. - In accordance with still another feature of the present invention, a magnet 260 (
FIG. 4 ) is utilized to attract theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 and to steer the leading end portion of the guide rod into the patient'strachea 228. Themagnet 260 is a permanent magnet formed of a strongly magnetizable material such as cobalt and neodymium. Of course, other known magnetizable materials having high saturation magnetization values, such as cerium, praseodymium, and/or samarium with cobalt and/or other materials, could be used. Alternatively, themagnet 260 may be an electromagnet - To enable the
leading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 to be attracted by a magnetic field emanating from themagnet 260, theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod contains ferrite particles. The ferrite particles may or may not be magnetized. Or course, other known magnetizable or magnetic particles could be utilized. When a magnet is positioned on theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250, the polarity of the leading end of the magnet on the guide rod is opposite from the polarity of themagnet 260. - As the
guide rod 250 is moved downward (as viewed inFIG. 4 ) along the patient's pharynx toward thelarynx 230, theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod enters the field of themagnet 260. The field of themagnet 260 has sufficient strength to cause theguide rod 250 to deflect slightly toward the right (as viewed inFIG. 4 ). As this occurs, theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod moves into thelarynx 230 at a location adjacent to the center of the larynx. This enables theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 to move between the vocal cords or folds 232 with a minimum of irritation to the vocal cords. Although themagnet 260 is described herein as steering theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 into the trachea, it is contemplated that the magnet could be utilized to steer members at many different locations in a patient's body. - The
magnet 260 may be an electromagnet. If themagnet 260 is an electromagnet, the magnet may be turned on and off, that is, energized and de-energized during steering of theleading end portion 252 of theguide 250. If desired, theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 could also be formed by an electromagnet. If this was done, conductors for connecting theleading end portion 252 of theguide 250 would extend along the inside of the guide rod. By reversing the direction of current flow to either the electromagnet forming themagnet 260 or the electromagnet forming theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250, the two electromagnets could be made to sequentially attract and repel each other. - Steering of the
leading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 with themagnet 360 is facilitated by moving the magnet along the patient'sneck 216, in the manner indicated schematically inFIG. 7 . Themagnet 360 may be moved up and down along the patient's neck. Themagnet 360 may also be moved sidewards relative to the patient's neck. By moving themagnet 360 relative to the patient's neck, a magnetic field emanating from the magnet is effective to pull theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 in the desired direction. - Although the use of the
magnet 260 has been disclosed herein in association with the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 4-10 , it is contemplated that themagnet 260 could be used in association with other embodiments of the invention. For example, themagnet 260 could be used with the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 1 and 2 . - The
magnet 260 may be used to steer devices other than theguide rod 250. When the positioning apparatus 56 (FIG. 1 ) is to be associated with a portion of a patient's body other than the trachea, the magnet 260 (FIG. 4 ) could be used to steer any one of many different devices to a desired location in the patient's body. A positioning apparatus, similar to thepositioning apparatus 56 ofFIG. 1 or thepositioning apparatus 256 ofFIG. 4 , and a magnet, similar to themagnet 260 may be used during endoscopic, arthroscopic, or fiber optic surgery at many different locations in a patient's body. Thus, themagnet 260 may be used to steer a guide rod being positioned relative to a joint by a positioning apparatus, similar to thepositioning apparatus 56 ofFIG. 1 and thepositioning apparatus 256 ofFIG. 4 , during surgery at the joint. Themagnet 260 may also be used to position medicants at desired locations in the patient's body. Although it is believed that themagnet 260 will be advantageously used in association with a positioning apparatus similar to thepositioning apparatus 56 ofFIG. 1 or theother positioning apparatus 256 ofFIG. 4 , the magnet may be used in situations where the positioning apparatus is not required. - The positioning apparatus 256 (
FIG. 4 ) positions theguide rod 250 relative to the patient'strachea 228 during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea. In addition, thepositioning apparatus 256 provides an indication of the distance which the guide rod is to be moved into the patient's trachea. By using thepositioning apparatus 256, a person moving theguide rod 250 into the patient'strachea 228 can know where theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod is located relative to the trachea. - During movement of the
guide rod 250 into the patient's trachea, the guide rod is moved axially through a flexible, generally cylindrical, guide tube 264 (FIG. 5 ). Theguide tube 264 is formed of a resilient polymeric material. Theguide tube 264 has amain section 266 and aleading end section 268. Theleading end section 268 has aside wall 270 which is thinner than aside wall 272 of themain section 266. Theside wall 270 is integrally molded as one piece with thethicker side wall 272. A generally cylindrical passage 274 (FIG. 5 ) extends axially through theguide tube 264. - The thin walled
leading end section 268 of theguide tube 264 is molded so as to naturally assume the arcuate configuration illustrated inFIGS. 4 and 5 . This enables theend section 268 of theguide tube 264 to be positioned in the patient's pharynx 220 (FIG. 4 ) with the end section forming a bend which extends around the upper end portion of the patient'sepiglottis 242. Since theleading end section 268 has a relatively thin side wall (FIG. 5 ), the end section can be easily deflected as it is moved into position in the patient'spharynx 220. Thethicker side wall 272 of themain section 266 of theguide tube 264 is effective to support theleading end section 268 in the patient'spharynx 220 and to depress a tongue 76 in themouth 212 of the patient (FIG. 1 ). - The
guide rod 250 may be formed of either polymeric material or metal. The illustratedpolymeric guide rod 250 has a relatively small diameter and is readily deflected. Theguide rod 250 has a circular cross sectional configuration. - The
guide rod 250 extends axially through the guide tube 264 (FIG. 4 ). Theguide rod 250 is axially movable relative to theguide tube 264 under the influence of force manually applied to the portion of the guide rod disposed to the right (as viewed inFIG. 4 ) of thepositioning apparatus 256. This force results in axial movement of theguide rod 250 along theguide tube 264. - As the
guide rod 250 is axially moved along theguide tube 264, the arcuateleading end section 268 of theguide tube 264 resiliently deflects theguide rod 250 to form the arcuate bend illustrated inFIG. 4 . As theguide rod 250 is manually pushed toward the left (as viewed inFIG. 4 ), the leadingend 52 of the guide rod moves downward (as viewed inFIG. 4 ) toward thelarynx 230. As theleading end 252 of theguide rod 250 moves downward (as viewed inFIG. 4 ), tissues which may tend to block movement of the guide rod are pushed aside by the leading end of the guide rod. This clears a passage for theguide rod 250 - The
positioning apparatus 256 is used to locate theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 as the guide rod moves along theguide tube 264. Thepositioning apparatus 256 includes abase section 278 and an upper section 280 (FIG. 4 ). Thebase section 278 engages the patient's Adam'sapple 234 to locate thepositioning apparatus 256 relative to the patient'strachea 228. Theupper section 280 of thepositioning apparatus 256 holds theguide tube 264 which guides movement of theguide rod 250 during insertion of the guide rod into the patient'strachea 228. - The
base section 278 andupper section 280 of thepositioning apparatus 256 cooperate to provide a measurement of the distance between the patient'smouth 212 and the patient's Adam'sapple 234. This distance will vary from patient to patient depending upon the size of the patient, the specific configuration of thehead 210 of the patient, and other factors. The distance which theguide rod 250 must be moved axially relative to theguide tube 264 to move theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod into the patient'slarynx 230 will vary as a function of variations in the distance between the patient'smouth 212 and the patient's Adam'sapple 234. This is because the patient's Adam'sapple 234 is located adjacent to the entrance to thetrachea 228. - The
base section 278 of thepositioning apparatus 256 includes an upright tubularcylindrical body section 286. Thebody section 286 has acylindrical chamber 288. The cylindricalupper section 280 of thepositioning apparatus 256 is telescopically received in thechamber 288. - In addition, the
base section 278 includes anend section 290. Theend section 290 extends perpendicular to thebody section 286. Theend section 290 has a cylindricalcentral passage 292 which extends perpendicular to and intersects the central axis of thechamber 288. Thebody section 286 and theend section 290 are integrally molded as one piece of polymeric material. - The
base section 278 also includes apositioning section 296 which engages the patient's Adam'sapple 234 and is supported by theend section 290. Thepositioning section 296 includes acylindrical support rod 298 which extends through thepassage 292 and is connected with a locatingportion 302 which engages the patient's Adam'sapple 234. The locatingportion 302 includes a generallyhemispherical dome 304 and a resilientannular collar 306 which is connected to the rim of thedome 304. Thecollar 306 extends around the Adam'sapple 234 and engages upper and lower sides and left and right sides of the Adam's apple to center thedome 304 on the Adam's apple. - If desired, the locating
portion 302 could be constructed to engage only two sides of the Adam'sapple 234. For example, the left and right sides of the Adam'sapple 234. It is believed that it may be desired to form the locatingportion 302 with the construction illustrated inFIGS. 25 and 26 herein. Alternatively, the locatingportion 302 could be constructed so as to engage only the central portion of the Adam'sapple 234. - However, it is believed that it may be desired to form the locating
portion 302 so that it extends around the Adam'sapple 234 so as to locate thepositioning section 296 relative to the Adam's apple. Force may be manually applied against thepositioning section 296 to minimize the anterior bend 240 (FIG. 10 ) which must be formed in thetracheal tube 238. Theend section 290 is axially slidable along thesupport rod 298 so that thebody section 286 is disposed adjacent to thechin 310 of the patient. - Although it is preferred to use the patient's Adam's
apple 234 to locate thepositioning apparatus 256 relative to the patient'strachea 228, a different portion of the patient's body could be used to locate the positioning apparatus relative to the patient's trachea. For example, the patient's shoulders could be used. Alternatively, bones in the patient'sneck 216 could be used to locate thepositioning apparatus 256 relative to the patient'strachea 228. However, it is believed that it will be preferred to use the patient's Adam'sapple 234 to locate thepositioning apparatus 256 due to the close proximity of the patient's Adam's apple to the upper end of the patient'strachea 228. - The
upper section 280 of thepositioning apparatus 256 includes acylindrical rod portion 314 which is telescopically received in thebody section 286 of the positioning apparatus. Anupper end section 316 has acylindrical passage 318 through which theguide tube 264 extends. Thepassage 318 has a longitudinal central axis which extends parallel to the longitudinal central axis of thepassage 292 and to the longitudinal central axis of thesupport rod 298. Theguide tube 264 is slidable in thepassage 318. - The
guide tube 264 extends from thepassage 318 into the patient'smouth 212. Thus, thepassage 318 in theupper section 280 of thepositioning apparatus 256 is axially aligned with the patient'smouth 212. Similarly, the passage 292 (FIG. 4 ) in theend section 290 of thebase section 278 of thepositioning apparatus 256 is axially aligned with the patient's Adam'sapple 234. Therefore, thepositioning apparatus 256 can be utilized to measure the distance between the Adam'sapple 234 and the patient'smouth 212. - The entrance through which the
guide rod 250 must pass into the patient'strachea 228 is adjacent to the Adam'sapple 234. Therefore, the distance through which theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 must be moved relative to the guide tube 264 (FIG. 4 ) to enter the patient'strachea 228, is a function of the distance between the patient's Adam'sapple 234 and the patient'smouth 212. Thepositioning apparatus 256 measures the distance between the patient's Adam'sapple 234 and the patient's mouth by determining the position of thebase section 278 andupper section 280 of the positioning apparatus relative to each other. - In the illustrated embodiment of the invention, the distance between the patient's Adam's
apple 234 and the patient'smouth 212 is indicated by indicia 324 (FIG. 6 ). Theindicia 324 is disposed on thecylindrical rod portion 314 of theupper section 280 of thepositioning apparatus 256. Therod portion 314 is telescopically received in thecylindrical chamber 288 in thebody section 286 of thepositioning apparatus 256. - The position of an annular
upper end surface 328 on (FIG. 6 ) thebody section 286 relative to theindicia 324 indicates the distance which therod portion 314 is extended from thebody section 286. The distance which therod portion 314 is extended from thebody section 286 is a function of the distance between the patient's Adam'sapple 234 and the entrance to the patient'smouth 212. - In the illustrated embodiment of the invention, the
indicia 324 is formed by a plurality ofcolored bands FIG. 6 ). Each of the bands 330-340 has a different color from the other bands. It should be understood that a lesser or greater number of colored bands 330-340 could be provided if desired. It should also be understood that although the bands 330-340 have the same axial extent, the bands could have different axial extents if desired. Rather than using the colored bands 330-340 as theindicia 324, numerical indicia could be provided. However, it is believed that it may be easier to read the different colored bands 330-340 than to read numerical indicia. -
Bands FIG. 8 ) are provided on theguide rod 250. The colored bands 342-350 have different colors which correspond to the colors of the bands 132-140 on the rod portion 314 (FIG. 6 ) of thepositioning apparatus 256. It should be understood that although only the bands 342-350 having colors corresponding to the colors of the bands 132-140 are illustrated, an additional band having a color corresponding to the color of theband 330 inFIG. 6 is provided on theguide rod 250. - The bands 342-350 (
FIG. 8 ) on theguide rod 250 cooperate with an annular end surface 356 (FIG. 4 ) on theguide tube 264 to indicate when theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod is in a desired position relative to the patient'strachea 228. Thus, assuming that thecolored band 334 on therod portion 314 of thepositioning apparatus 256 is aligned with theend surface 328 on the body section 286 (as illustrated inFIG. 6 ), the band 344 (FIG. 8 ) on theguide rod 250 will be moved to a position in which it is partially covered by theguide tube 264 and projects outward from the end surface 356 (FIG. 4 ) for a distance corresponding to the distance which theband 334 projects outward from theend surface 328 on the body section 286 (FIG. 5 ). Theband 344 has a color which is the same as the color of theband 334. When theguide rod 250 has been moved to a position in which theband 344 is partially enclosed by theguide tube 264, theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod will have moved through a desired distance into the patient'strachea 228, for example, a distance of approximately ten centimeters. - The bands 342-350 (
FIG. 8 ) on theguide rod 250 are spaced a predetermined distance from the end surface 356 (FIG. 4 ) on theguide tube 264 when theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod is disposed in abutting engagement with theleading end section 268 of theguide tube 264. During movement of the indicia on theguide rod 250 from a position spaced from theend surface 356 of theguide tube 264 to a position in which the leading band on the guide rod 150 is adjacent to theend surface 356, theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 will have moved from thepharynx 220 of the patient and into thelarynx 230 past thevocal cords 232. - As the
guide rod 250 continues to be manually pushed into theguide tube 264, theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod advances downward (as viewed inFIG. 4 ) in thetrachea 228 of the patient. Movement of theguide rod 250 into thetrachea 228 of the patient is interrupted when theband 344 having a color corresponding to the color of the band 334 (FIG. 6 ) has been partially covered by theguide tube 264. - The
magnet 260 is utilized to steer theguide rod 250 during movement of theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod from the patient'smouth 212 into the patient'strachea 228. As theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 is moved downward along the inside of the patient's neck, themagnet 360 is moved downward along the outside of the patient's neck. The magnetic field provided by themagnet 360 is effective to pull theleading end portion 252 downward as the magnet moves downward. Eventually, theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 andmagnet 260 will move downward from the entrance to thetrachea 228 through a desired distance, for example a distance of approximately ten centimeters. Of course, theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 could be moved through a different distance into thetrachea 228 if desired. - It is contemplated that the distance between the patient's Adam's
apple 234 and the entrance to the patient'smouth 212 will vary from patient to patient. However, the distance which theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 is moved into the patient'strachea 228 will remain constant at a desired distance, for example, ten centimeters. This is because as the distance measured by thepositioning apparatus 256 increases, the distance which theguide rod 250 is moved relative to theguide tube 264 increases. Conversely, as the distance which is measured by thepositioning apparatus 256 decreases, the distance which theguide rod 250 is moved relative to theguide tube 264 decreases. The distance which is measured by thepositioning apparatus 256 varies as a function of the distance between themouth 212 andlarynx 230 of the patient. - Once the
guide rod 250 has been moved through a desired distance into the patient'strachea 228, theguide tube 264 andpositioning apparatus 256 are separated from theguide rod 250 while the guide rod remains stationary relative to the patient's trachea. Thus, once the indicia on theguide rod 250 indicates that theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod has been moved through a desired distance into the patient'strachea 228, axial movement of theguide rod 250 is interrupted. At this time, one of the colored bands 342-350 on theguide rod 250 corresponding to the one of the colored bands 330-340 aligned with the end surface 328 (FIG. 4 ) on thebody section 286 of the positioning apparatus is aligned with the end surface 356 (FIG. 4 ) on theguide tube 264. - The
guide tube 264 is then slid axially outward, that is toward the right as viewed inFIG. 4 , along theguide rod 250. During this sliding movement of theguide tube 264 along theguide rod 250, the guide rod is manually held against movement relative to the patient'smouth 212 andtrachea 228. Thepositioning apparatus 256 is moved away from the patient along with theguide tube 264. - Once the
guide tube 264 has been separated from the guide rod 250 (FIG. 9 ), thetracheal tube 238 is slid along theguide rod 250 into the patient'strachea 228. Thus, the end of theguide rod 250 remote from the patient'smouth 212 andtrachea 228 is inserted into thetracheal tube 238. As this is done, theguide rod 250 is manually held against movement relative to the patient'smouth 212 andtrachea 228. Thetracheal tube 238 is then moved axially along theguide rod 250 while theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod remains stationary in the patient's trachea. If desired, themagnet 260 may be utilized to attract theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250, in the manner illustrated inFIG. 9 , to facilitate maintaining of the leading end portion of the guide rod stationary in the patient'strachea 228. - As the
tracheal tube 238 is moved axially along theguide rod 250, the guide rod directs the leading end portion of the tracheal tube along a bend 360 (FIG. 9 ) formed in the guide rod. After the leading end portion of thetracheal tube 238 has moved around thebend 360, the leading end portion of the tracheal tube enters the patient's larynx and moves past thevocal cords 232. The leading end of thetracheal tube 238 is centered in the space between the vocal cords and the entrance to the patient's trachea by theguide rod 250. This minimizes irritation of the patient'svocal cords 232. Thetracheal tube 238 is moved along theguide rod 250 at least until the leading end of the tracheal tube engages theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250. - It is contemplated that it may be desired to move the
tracheal tube 238 further into the patient's trachea than the distance which theguide rod 250 is moved into the patient's trachea. If this is the case, thetracheal tube 238 is pushed axially along theguide rod 250 past theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod. As this occurs, theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 is compressed slightly and enters thetracheal tube 238. - Once the
tracheal tube 238 has been moved to a desired depth into the patient'strachea 228, theguide rod 250 is removed from the tracheal tube (FIG. 10 ). Thetracheal tube 238 then provides a passage for the conduction air, other gases, and/or medication to the patient's lungs. - When the
tracheal tube 238 is to be inserted into a patient'strachea 228, theguide rod 250 is first positioned relative to theguide tube 264 at a location spaced from the patient. At this time, theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 is disposed in abutting engagement with theleading end portion 268 of theguide tube 264. Theupper section 280 of thepositioning apparatus 256 is loosely positioned on theguide tube 264. The lower orbase section 278 of thepositioning apparatus 256 is separate and spaced from theupper section 280 of the positioning apparatus. A suitable lubricant may be applied to theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 and to theleading end portion 268 of theguide tube 264. - The
guide tube 264 is then inserted into the patient'smouth 212. As theguide tube 264 is inserted into the patient's mouth, theleading end portion 268 of theguide tube 264 and theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 move from the patient's mouth into thepharynx 220 of the patient. As theleading end portion 268 of theguide tube 264 moves into thepharynx 220 of the patient, the natural resilience of the material of the guide tube causes the guide tube to spring back to its initial or free configuration illustrated inFIGS. 3 and 4 . - As the
guide tube 264 and guiderod 250 are manually moved together into the patient'smouth 212, the guide tube bends itself around the upper (as viewed inFIG. 3 ) portion of the patient'sepiglottis 242. This results in theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 being pointed downward (as viewed inFIG. 3 ) toward the lower end portion of the patient'spharynx 220. A person initially inserting theguide tube 264 and guiderod 250 into the patient'smouth 212 can visually ascertain when the guide tube and guide rod have moved to the position illustrated inFIG. 3 - When the
guide tube 264 and guiderod 250 have been positioned in this manner relative to the patient'smouth 212 andpharynx 220, thepositioning apparatus 256 is assembled. To assemble the positioning apparatus, therod portion 314 of theupper section 280 is telescopically inserted into thechamber 288 in thebody section 286 of the positioning apparatus. Contemporaneously therewith, the locatingportion 302 of thepositioning apparatus 296 is moved into engagement with the patient's Adam'sapple 234. Thebase section 278 andupper section 280 of thepositioning apparatus 256 are moved axially along theguide tube 264 andsupport rod 298 until the base section and upper section of thepositioning apparatus 256 are adjacent to the patient's chin 310 (FIG. 4 ). At this time, the coincident central axes of therod portion 314 andbody section 286 of thepositioning apparatus 256 will extend perpendicular to the central axes of theguide tube 264 andsupport rod 298. - The
magnet 260 is then positioned immediately beneath the patient's Adam'sapple 234. This enables the magnetic field from themagnet 260 to extend leftward and upward (as viewed inFIG. 4 ) to the entrance to the patient'slarynx 230. This results in themagnet 260 andpositioning apparatus 256 being disposed in the orientation illustrated inFIG. 3 relative to the patient. - Once the
positioning apparatus 256,guide tube 264 and guiderod 250 have been moved to the positions shown inFIG. 3 relative to the patient'shead 210, the person using thepositioning apparatus 256 visually determines the distance between the patient's Adam'sapple 234 and the patient'smouth 212. This is accomplished by viewing the indicia 324 (FIG. 6 ) on therod portion 314 of thepositioning apparatus 256. By determining which of the bands 330-340 is aligned with theend surface 328 on thebody section 286 of thepositioning apparatus 256, the operator determines the distance between the patient's Adam's apple and the patient's mouth. The distance which theguide rod 250 must be moved into the patient'strachea 228 is a direct function of the distance between the patient's Adam'sapple 234 and the patient'smouth 212. - The operator then begins to manually apply force against the rightward (as viewed in
FIG. 4 ) portion of theguide rod 250 while holding theguide tube 264 against movement. This results in theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod moving downward toward the entrance to the patient'slarynx 230. As theguide rod 250 begins to move downward, the bentleading end portion 268 of the guide tube 60 directs theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 80 downward around the patient'sepiglottis 242 in a direction toward the entrance to thelarynx 230. - It is contemplated that the resiliently
deflectable guide rod 250 will initially be formed with a bend which is a continuation of the bend in the leading end portion of theguide tube 264. Therefore, the natural resilience of theguide rod 250 will tend to cause the guide rod to bend rightward toward the patient's Adam's apple as theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod begins to move downward toward thelarynx 230. - As the
leading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 approaches the entrance to thelarynx 230, the field emanating from themagnet 260 attracts theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250. The magnetic attraction forces applied to theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 also promote rightward (as viewed inFIG. 4 ) bending of theguide rod 250 toward the patient's Adam'sapple 234. Thus, the combined effect of themagnet 260 and the natural resilience of the preformedguide rod 250 urge theleading end portions 52 of theguide rod 250 toward the entrance to thelarynx 230 and away from the adjacent entrance to theesophagus 226. This ensures that theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 enters thetrachea 228 rather than theesophagus 226. If desired, themagnet 260 could be positioned above or on the patient's Adam'sapple 234 and then moved downward as theguide rod 250 advances. - If desired, the
flexible guide rod 250 could initially be formed with a straight configuration and only themagnet 260 would steer theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod into the entrance to thetrachea 228. Alternatively, the use of themagnet 260 could be eliminated and only the preformed configuration of theguide rod 250 would be used to direct theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod into the entrance to thetrachea 228. However, it is believed that it will be preferred to use both the preformed configuration of theguide rod 250 and themagnet 260 to direct theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod into the patient'strachea 228. - The colored bands 342-350 (
FIG. 8 ) on theguide rod 250 cooperate with the end surface 356 (FIG. 4 ) of theguide tube 264 to provide an indication of the location of theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 234. As theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 moves downward from the position shown inFIG. 3 toward the entrance to thelarynx 230, the indicia bands 342-350 will move toward theend surface 356 of theguide rod 250. As theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 moves through the entrance to thelarynx 230, the indicia on theguide rod 250 will be approaching theend surface 356 of theguide tube 264. - Continued axial movement of the
guide rod 250 relative to thestationary guide tube 264 moves theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod to a position immediately above the patient'svocal cords 232. As this occurs, theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 is strongly attracted by the magnetic field emanating from themagnet 260. Due to the approach of the indicia on theguide rod 250 toward theend surface 356 of theguide tube 264, the operator realizes that theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 is adjacent to themagnet 260 and moves the magnet downward (as viewed inFIG. 4 ) along theneck 216 of the patient as theguide rod 250 continues to be moved leftward through thestationary guide tube 264. As themagnet 260 is manually moved downward (as viewed inFIG. 4 ) with theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250, the magnet continues to attract the leading end portion of the guide rod. - One of the bands 330-340, having a particular color, for instance, red, on the rod portion 314 (
FIG. 6 ) will be adjacent to theend surface 328 on the body section of thepositioning apparatus 256. When a correspondingly colored band, that is, when thered band 344 on the guide rod 250 (FIG. 8 ), is partially covered by theguide tube 264 and extends axially outward from theend surface 356, the operator will know that theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 will have moved past the vocal 232 to the desired position relative to the patient's trachea. Insertion of theguide rod 250 into theguide tube 264 is then interrupted. - After the
guide rod 250 has been inserted for the desired distance into the patient'strachea 228, theguide tube 264 andpositioning apparatus 256 are separated from theguide rod 250. During separation of theguide tube 264 andpositioning apparatus 256 from theguide rod 250, the guide rod is maintained stationary relative to a patient'strachea 228. In the illustrated embodiment of the invention, theguide tube 264 is merely moved rightward (as viewed in FIG. 4) along thestationary guide rod 250 to disengage the guide tube and the positioning apparatus from the guide rod. - If desired, a slot could be provided in the
guide tube 264 to facilitate disengagement of the guide tube from the guide rod. A corresponding slot could be formed in theend section 316 of thepositioning apparatus 256. The slots in theguide tube 264 andend section 316 could be partially or fully blocked during insertion of theguide rod 250 into theguide tube 264. When theguide tube 264 is to be separated from theguide rod 250, that is after the guide rod has been inserted for the desired distance into the patient'strachea 228, latch or closure members for the slots could be moved to open positions and theguide tube 264 andapparatus 256 moved out of engagement with thestationary guide rod 250. - Once the
guide tube 264 andpositioning apparatus 256 have been disengaged from theguide rod 250, the guide rod is utilized to guide movement of thetracheal tube 238 into the patient'strachea 228. Thetracheal tube 238 has a substantially larger diameter than theguide tube 264 to provide for a relatively large central opening through which air or other gas may pass into the patient'strachea 228. - When the
tracheal tube 238 is to be moved into the patient'strachea 228, theguide rod 250 is telescopically inserted into the leading end of the tracheal tube. At this time, the right end (as viewed inFIG. 4 ) of theguide rod 250 will extend beyond the far right end of thetracheal tube 238. Therefore, theguide rod 250 can be manually grasped and thetracheal tube 238 moved axially along the guide rod while the guide rod remains stationary relative to the patient'strachea 228. - The
tracheal tube 238 is moved leftward, in the manner indicated by the arrow inFIG. 9 , along thestationary guide rod 250 into the patient'smouth 212. Thetracheal tube 238 is then moved around thebend 360 in thestationary guide rod 250 and into the patient'strachea 228. Since theguide rod 250 extends from the patient'spharynx 220 into thetrachea 228, theguide rod 250 blocks movement of the leading end portion of thetracheal tube 238 into the patient'sesophagus 226. Theguide rod 250 acts as a track along which thetracheal tube 238 moves into the patient'slarynx 230 and not into theadjacent esophagus 226. - As the leading end portion of the
tracheal tube 238 approaches and moves past thevocal cords 232, theguide rod 250 guides movement of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube in such a manner as to minimize irritation of the vocal cords. Thus, theguide rod 250 centers the leading end portion of thetracheal tube 238 in the space between the vocal cords. By lubricating the leading end portion of thetracheal tube 238 and centering the leading end portion of the tracheal tube in the space between thevocal cords 232, the tracheal tube can be moved into the patient'strachea 228 with a minimal amount of irritation to the vocal cords. - As the
tracheal tube 238 is moved through the patient'slarynx 230, themagnet 260 is disposed adjacent to theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250. Therefore, theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 is attracted by themagnet 260 and tends to remain stationary in the patient'strachea 228. As thetracheal tube 238 is inserted into the patient'strachea 228, the leading end portion of thetracheal tube 238 moves past theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250. As this occurs, theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250 is slightly compressed and moves into thetracheal tube 238. Once thetracheal tube 238 has moved to a desired position relative to thetrachea 228, theguide rod 250 is withdrawn from thetracheal tube 238 while the tracheal tube is maintained stationary relative to the patient's trachea. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 4-10 , the magnet 260 (FIG. 4 ) is utilized to attract theleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250. However, it is contemplated that themagnet 260 could be used for other purposes if desired. For example, themagnet 260 could be used to position a suture anchor relative to body tissue. - When the
magnet 260 is to be utilized to position a suture anchor relative to body tissue, a leading end portion of the suture anchor is formed of a magnetizable material, such a ferrite. Alternatively, the leading end portion of the suture anchor could be formed of a magnetic material such as cobalt, neodymium, cerium, praseodymium, and/or samarium. If this was done, themagnet 260 would be oriented relative to the magnet on the suture anchor to have a pole of themagnet 260 of opposite polarity to the leading end of the suture anchor toward the suture anchor. - The trailing end portion of the suture anchor may be formed of a nonmagnetic material, such as a biodegradable polymer. The suture would extend through an opening in the nonmagnetic material of the trailing end portion of the suture anchor. Once the suture anchor had been moved to a desired position relative to body tissue by attraction of the
magnet 260 for the leading end portion of the suture anchor, the leading end portion of the suture anchor may be separated from the trailing end portion of the suture anchor. The leading end portion of the suture anchor could then be removed from the patient's body to eliminate the possibility of an undesired interaction in the future with a magnetic field device, such as a magnetic resonance imaging device (MRI). The suture would be held in place by the nonmagnetic trailing end portion of the suture anchor - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 4-10 , aguide tube 264 is utilized to guide movement of theguide rod 250 as the guide rod is moved from the patient'spharynx 220 into the patient'strachea 228. Theguide tube 264 is then removed and atracheal tube 238 is slid along theguide rod 250 into the patient's trachea. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 11 , the tracheal tube is used to guide movement of the guide rod into the patient's trachea. This eliminates the need for a separate guide tube. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 11 is generally similar to the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 4-9 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “a” being associated being associated with the numerals ofFIG. 11 to avoid confusion. - A patient's
head 210 a (FIG. 11 ) includes amouth 212 a which is connected with athroat 214 a in aneck 216 a of the patient. Apharynx 220 a is connected with anesophagus 226 a and atrachea 228 a. Alarynx 230 a forms an upper end portion of thetrachea 228 a and containsvocal cords 232 a. An Adam'sapple 234 a is formed by laminae of cartilage in the patient'slarynx 230 a. - A positioning apparatus 256 a is utilized to position a
tracheal tube 238 a and a guide rod orwire 250 a during insertion of the guide rod and during insertion of the tracheal tube into the patient'strachea 228 a. Thetracheal tube 238 a (FIG. 11 ) is flexible and is formed of a resilient polymeric material. Thetracheal tube 238 a is initially formed with abend 380 in a leading end portion of the tracheal tube. When thetracheal tube 238 a is released or unrestrained, the natural resilience of the tracheal tube causes thebend 380 to form in the manner illustrated inFIG. 10 . However, thetracheal tube 238 a is flexible so that thebend 380 is easily removed from the tracheal tube by the application of a relatively small force or pressure against the leading end portion of the tracheal tube. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIG. 10 , thebend 380 in thetracheal tube 238 a has a greater extent than a corresponding bend in aleading end section 268 of the guide tube 264 (FIG. 4 ). If desired, the bend in thetracheal tube 238 a (FIG. 11 ) could be shortened so that the leading end portion of thetracheal tube 238 a has a configuration which corresponds to the configuration of theguide tube 264 ofFIG. 4 - The positioning apparatus 256 a (
FIG. 11 ) includes abase section 278 a and anupper section 280 a. Arod portion 314 a of theupper section 280 a is telescopically received in achamber 288 a in thebase section 278 a.Indicia 324 a on therod portion 314 a cooperates with abody section 286 a of thebase section 278 a to provide a visual indication of the distance between the patient's Adam'sapple 234 a and the patient'smouth 212 a in the manner previously described in conjunction with the positioning apparatus ofFIG. 4 . - The
base section 278 a of the positioning apparatus 256 a includes a positioning section 96 a which engages the patient's Adam'sapple 234 a. The positioning section 96 a includes a locatingportion 302 a which engages the patient's Adam'sapple 234 a. The locatingportion 302 a includes adome 304 a and a softannular collar 306 a. Rather than using thecollar 306 a, it may be preferred to utilize a pair of positioning fingers which engage theneck 216 a of the patient at laterally opposite sides of the Adam'sapple 234 a. - Indicia (not shown) is provided on the
guide rod 250 a to indicate the position of the guide rod relative to a proximal end of thetracheal tube 238 a, that is, the right end as viewed inFIG. 11 . It should be understood that thetracheal tube 238 a and theguide rod 250 a extend toward the right from the fragmentary end portions illustrated inFIG. 11 . The indicia on theguide rod 250 a is formed by bands corresponding to the bands 342-350 ofFIG. 8 . Rather than cooperating with the end 156 (FIG. 4 ) of aguide tube 264, the bands on theguide rod 250 a (FIG. 11 ) cooperate with an end (not shown) of thetracheal tube 238 a to indicate the position of theguide rod 250 a relative to thetracheal tube 238 a. - When the
guide rod 250 a is to be moved from the patient'spharynx 220 a into the patient'strachea 228 a, the guide rod is moved axially relative to the stationarytracheal tube 238 a. As this occurs, aleading end portion 252 a of theguide rod 250 a moves downward (as viewed inFIG. 11 ) past the patient's vocal cords or folds 32 a and into the patient's trachea. As theleading end portion 252 a of theguide rod 250 a moves from the patient'spharynx 220 a into the patient'strachea 228 a, the leading end portion of the guide rod gently deflects body tissue. For example, theleading end portion 252 a of theguide rod 250 a may gently engage and slightly deflect the patient's vocal cords or folds 32 a. - A
magnet 260 a is initially positioned adjacent to the patient's Adam'sapple 234 a, in the manner indicated in dashed lines inFIG. 11 . Ferrite particles in the soft, resiliently compressibleleading end portion 252 a of theguide wire 250 a are attracted by themagnet 260 a. This attraction causes theleading end portion 252 a of theguide wire 250 a to move into the open upper end portion of thetrachea 228 rather than into the adjacent open upper end portion of theesophagus 226 a. In addition, movement of theleading end portion 252 a of theguide wire 250 a into the open upper end portion of thetrachea 228 is promoted by thebend 380 in thetracheal tube 238 a. If desired, themagnet 260 a could initially be positioned on or above the patient's Adam'sapple 234 a and moved downward from there. - As the guide wire continues to be inserted into the
tracheal tube 238 a, the guide wire moves downward in the patient'strachea 228 a. At the same time, themagnet 260 a is moved downward along the outer side of the patient'sneck 216 a. The indicia (not shown) on theguide rod 250 a provides an indication to an operator of the position of theleading end portion 252 a of the guide rod. This enables the operator to follow theleading end portion 252 a of theguide rod 250 a with themagnet 260 a as the guide rod continues to be moved through thetracheal tube 238 a into the patient'strachea 228 a. - Once the
guide rod 250 a has been moved for a desired distance into thetrachea 228 a, theguide rod 250 a is held stationary relative to the patient's trachea. Thetracheal tube 238 a is then moved axially toward the left (as viewed inFIG. 11 ) and downward into the patient'strachea 228 a. During this downward movement of thetracheal tube 238 a, theguide rod 250 a blocks sidewise movement of the leading end of the tracheal tube so that the tracheal tube enters thelarynx 230 a rather than the adjacent open upper end of theesophagus 226 a. As thetracheal tube 238 a continues to be inserted into thetrachea 228 a, the leading end of thetracheal tube 238 a moves into engagement with theleading end portion 252 a of theguide rod 250 a. Theleading end portion 252 a of theguide rod 250 a is then compressed somewhat by the leading end portion of thetracheal tube 238 a and moves into the passage in the tracheal tube. Thetracheal tube 238 a is then moved further into thetrachea 228 a. - After the
tracheal tube 238 a has been positioned relative to the patient's trachea, theguide rod 250 a is withdrawn from the tracheal tube while the tracheal tube remains stationary relative to the patient'strachea 228 a. The positioning apparatus 256 a is then separated from thetracheal tube 238 a. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIG. 1 , aleading end portion 52 of the guide wire orrod 50 is inserted between the vocal cords or folds in therespiratory system 11 of the patient. It's contemplated that movement of theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50 between thevocal cords 32 to a desired depth in the patient'strachea 28 may be facilitated by transmitting images of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the guide rod to a viewing location outside of the patient's body. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 12 is generally similar in the embodiment invention illustrated inFIGS. 1 and 2 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “b” being added to the numerals ofFIG. 12 in order to avoid confusion. - A
positioning apparatus 56 b is utilized to position aflexible guide rod 50 b relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11 b. Thepositioning apparatus 56 b includes abase section 78 b which is connected with apositioning section 96 b. Thepositioning section 96 b engages the patient's Adam'sapple 34 b. Anarcuate member 108 b is connected with thebase section 78 b. Theguide rod 50 b is moveable relative to aguide section 114 b connected witharcuate member 108 b. The construction and the manner of using thepositioning apparatus 56 b and guiderod 50 b is the same as was previously described in conjunction with the embodiment invention illustrated inFIGS. 1 and 2 . - In accordance with a feature the embodiment invention illustrated in
FIG. 12 , light from alight source 400 is conducted through afiber optic tube 402 to aleading end portion 52 b of theflexible guide rod 50 b. The light transmitted from thelight source 400 through thefiber optic tube 402 to theleading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b is directed from the leading end portion of the guide rod on to adjacent body tissue, in the manner indicated schematically at 404 inFIG. 12 . If desired, a plurality of fiberoptic tubes 402 could be provided to conduct light from thelight source 400 to theleading end portion 52 b of the guide rod. These fiber optic tubes could be bundled together or could be spaced part at theleading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b. - The light 404 which illuminates the body tissue immediately ahead of the
leading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b is reflected from the body tissue and is transmitted through afiber optic tube 408 to theeye 410 of a viewer. This results in the transmission of an image of the body tissue adjacent to theleading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b to the viewer to facilitate visualization, by the viewer, of the body tissue. If desired, a plurality of fiberoptic tubes 408 could be provided to conduct light from theleading end portion 52 b of the guide rod to theeye 410 of the viewer. These fiber optic tubes could be bundled together or could be spaced apart at theleading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b. - By visualizing the body tissue immediately ahead of the
leading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b, the viewer can determine the location of the leading end portion of the guide rod relative to thelarynx 30 b andvocal chords 32 b of a patient as the leading end portion of the guide rod moves into the larynx and between the vocal chords. Since the light 404 illuminates body tissue immediately ahead of theleading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b, the light enables the viewer to continuously visualize where theleading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b is located along the insertion path in therespiratory system 11 b of the patient. - In the embodiment invention illustrated in
FIG. 12 , thefiber optic tubes guide rod 50 b to enable an image of body tissue immediately ahead of theleading end portion 52 b of the guide rod to be transmitted to a viewer. It is contemplated that movement of a tracheal tube, corresponding totracheal tube 38 ofFIG. 2 , along theguide rod 50 b into the patient'srespiratory system 11 b will be facilitated by illuminating body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube. Therefore, the side wall of the tracheal tube may be provided with fiber optic tubes which transmit light from a light source, such as alight source 400, to a location immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube and transmit an image of illuminated body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of tracheal tube to a viewer. - As the tracheal tube is moved along the
guide rod 50 b into the patient's respiratory system, in the manner previously explained in conjunction with the embodiment invention illustrated inFIG. 2 , body tissue immediately ahead of theleading end portion 52 b of thestationary guide rod 50 b is illuminated and body tissue immediately ahead of the tracheal tube is illuminated. Therefore, as the leading end portion of the tracheal tube approaches thevocal chords 32 b, a surgeon or other viewer can easily determine the location of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube relative to the vocal chords. As the leading end portion of the tracheal tube approaches theleading end portion 52 b of the guide rod, the image transmitted to the viewer will be of body tissue illuminated by both light transmitted from theleading end portion 52 b of the guide rod and light transmitted from the leading end portion of the tracheal tube. - The leading end portion of the tracheal tube may be inserted into
trachea 28 b of a patient for greater distance than the distance which theguide rod 50 b is inserted into the trachea. As the leading end portion of the tracheal tube moves past theleading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b, illumination from the leading end portion of theguide rod 50 b will be at least partially blocked from transmission back to the viewer through fiber optics in the tracheal tube. Therefore, the viewer will easily be able to determine when the leading end portion of the tracheal tube has moved past the leading end portion of theguide rod 50 b. - Although the
eye 410 of a viewer has been schematically illustrated inFIG. 12 , it is contemplated that the image transmitted through thefiber optic tube 408 may be displayed on a viewing screen. If this was done, the image transmitted through thefiber optic tube 408 would be transmitted to a computer and a viewing screen associated with the computer would display an image of the body tissue immediately ahead of theleading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b. As the tracheal tube is moved along the guide rod into the patient'srespiratory system 11 b, an image of body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube may also be transmitted to the computer. - A second computer screen may be utilized to display an image of the body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube. If this is done, the surgeon or other viewer would be able to see an image of body tissue immediately ahead the
leading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b and an image of body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube. When simultaneously viewing the two images on two separate screens or on separate portions of a single screen, the surgeon or other viewer would be able to determine the positions of the leading end portions of both theguide rod 50 b and the tracheal tube relative to each other and to therespiratory system 11 b of a patient. - Although it's preferred to utilize the tracheal tube and it's associated illumination system in conjunction with the
guide rod 50 b, the tracheal tube may be utilized by itself. Thus, fiber optic tubes which extend through the side wall of the tracheal tube and correspond to thefiber optic tubes FIG. 12 , would provide an image of the body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube as the tracheal tube is moved into the patient'srespiratory system 11 b along an insertion path. The image transmitted from the leading end portion of the tracheal tube to the eye of the viewer or to a display screen would enable a surgeon or other viewer to determine the location of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11 b. - When the tracheal tube and it's associated illumination and image transmitting systems are utilized without
guide rod 50 b, thepositioning apparatus 56 b may be modified to guide movement of the tracheal tube in much the same manner as in which thepositioning apparatus 56 b is utilized to guide movement of theguide rod 50 b. If this is done, colored bands or other indicia could be provided on the tracheal tube to indicate the position of the tracheal tube in the same manner as previously discussed in connection with theguide rods - It is contemplated that the
positioning apparatus 56 b may be used for purposes other than tracheal intubination. Thus, thepositioning apparatus 56 b may be used to position devices other than theguide rod 50 b during endoscopic, arthroscopic, or fiber optic surgery at any one of many locations in a patient's body. A magnet, similar to themagnet 260 ofFIGS. 4 and 7 may be used to steer a leading end portion of the device being positioned in the patient's body. The leading end portion of the device being positioned in the patient's body may be located at a position adjacent to or spaced a desired distance from a positioning section, corresponding to thepositioning section 96 b, by the use of suitable indicia, which may be similar to the indicia used in conjunction with theguide rods - When the
positioning apparatus 50 b is to be used to position a medicant or a device of any desired type at a selected location in a patient's body, thepositioning section 96 b is positioned in engagement with a selected portion of the patient's body. The selected portion of the patient's body may be a portion of the patient's body other than the Adam'sapple 34 b. Although it is believed that it will probably be preferred to engage an exterior surface on the patient's body with thepositioning section 96 b, the positioning section could be placed in engagement with a surface disposed within the patient's body if desired - While the
positioning section 96 b is engaging the selected portion of the patient's body, theguide rod 50 b or a similar elongated member is moved relative to theguide section 114 b connected with thearcuate member 108 b. Theleading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b or similar elongated member is then moved into the patient's body. Theleading end portion 52 b may be moved into the patient's body through a naturally occurring opening or through an incision formed in the patient's body. - The image transmitted through the guide rod or similar
elongated member 50 b to the viewer will indicate when theleading end portion 52 b has moved to a desired position in the patient's body. Once theleading end portion 52 b of the guide rod or similarelongated member 50 b has moved to the desired position relative to the patient's body, any desired procedure may be performed in the patient's body. For example, a surgical procedure could be conducted with one or more devices connected with theleading end portion 52 b of the guide rod or similar elongated member. Thepositioning apparatus 56 b may be used to position a therapeutic agent or device at the desired position in the patient's body. - In the embodiment invention illustrated in
FIG. 12 , thelight source 400 and fiberoptic tube 402 function as an emitter which emitsillumination 404 onto body tissue immediately ahead of theleading end portion 52 b of theguide rod 50 b to facilitate visualization of the body tissue. In the embodiment invention illustrated inFIGS. 13 and 14 , a plurality of emitters are positioned adjacent to an outer side surface of the patient's neck. A detector on a leading end portion of a guide rod is moved into the patient's respiratory system. Since the embodiment invention illustrated inFIGS. 13 and 14 is generally similar to the embodiment invention illustrated inFIGS. 1 , 2 and 12, similar numerals will be utilized to identify similar components, the suffix letter “c” being associated with the numerals ofFIGS. 13 and 14 to avoid confusion - A
positioning apparatus 56 c (FIG. 13 ) is utilized to position a flexible guide wire orrod 50 c relative to arespiratory system 11 c of a patient. Therespiratory system 11 c of the patient extends from themouth 12 c through alarynx 30 c to atrachea 28 c of the patient. Thepositioning apparatus 56 c engages an Adam'sapple 34 c of a patient to locate theguide rod 50 c relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11 c. - The
positioning apparatus 56 c has the same general construction and mode operation as thepositioning apparatus 56 ofFIGS. 1 and 2 . Thepositioning apparatus 56 c includes abase section 78 c having abody section 86 c which is pivotally connected with apositioning section 96 c. Thepositioning section 96 c engages an outer surface of the neck of the patient adjacent to the Adam'sapple 34 c to locate thepositioning apparatus 56 c relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11 c. If desired, thepositioning apparatus 96 c could include a collar which would extend around the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c in the matter previously described in conjunction with the embodiment invention illustrated inFIG. 7 . Alternatively, thepositioning apparatus 96 c could include a pair of fingers which engage opposite lateral sides of the patient's Adam's apple. - An
arcuate member 108 c is connected with and is moveable relative to thebody section 86 c of thepositioning apparatus 56 c at aconnection 110 c. Aflexible guide rod 50 c is axially slidable relative to aguide section 114 c which is connected with thearcuate member 108 c. The construction of thepositioning apparatus 56 c is the same as was previously described in conjunction with the embodiment invention illustrated inFIGS. 1 and 2 . - In accordance with a feature of the embodiment invention illustrated in
FIG. 13 , asensor assembly 420 is provided to inform a surgeon or other user of thepositioning apparatus 56 c, of the position of theguide rod 50 c relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11 c. Thesensor assembly 420 includes an emitter portion 424 (FIG. 14 ) which provides an output and a detector portion 426 (FIG. 13 ) which responds to the output from theemitter portion 424. In the embodiment of invention illustrated inFIGS. 13 and 14 , theemitter portion 424 is positioned on an outer side surface of the neck of the patient adjacent to the Adam'sapple 34 c. Thedetector portion 426 is connected with aleading end portion 52 c of aguide rod 50 c. However, it should be understood that theemitter portion 424 could be connected with theguide rod 50 c and thedetector portion 426 positioned adjacent to the Adam'sapple 34 c of the patient. - In the illustrated embodiment invention, the
emitter portion 424 of thesensor assembly 420 includes a plurality ofemitters units 430 which are positioned an array which extends around the Adam'sapple 34 c (FIG. 14 ) of the patient. Theemitter units 430 are secured to the neck of the patient by a suitable adhesive. Theemitter units 430 may be positioned in any desired spatial relationship with the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c. - Alternatively, the
emitter units 430 may be connected with thepositioning section 96 c. Thus, thepositioning section 96 c of thepositioning apparatus 56 c is provided with three fingers which engage the neck of the patient adjacent to the Adam'sapple 34 c. Each of theemitter units 430 may be connected with one of the fingers of thepositioning section 96 c. Thepositioning section 96 c would accurately locate theemitter units 430 relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIG. 13 , thepositioning section 96 c engages the Adam'sapple 34 c and the emitter units are disposed in a generally circular array which extends around the Adam'sapple 34 c. However, it should be understood that theemitter units 430 could be connected with a collar, similar to thecollar 306 ofFIG. 7 . The collar may be connected with thepositioning section 96 c (FIG. 13 ). Alternatively, the collar could be separate from the positioning apparatus. - Although it is preferred to utilize the
positioning apparatus 56 c in conjunction with theguide rod 50 c, in the manner previously described in conjunction with the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 1 , it is contemplated that thepositioning apparatus 56 c may be omitted and theguide rod 50 c moved along an insertion path into the patient's respiratory system without benefit of the assistance provided by the positioning apparatus. If this is done, the emitter units 430 (FIG. 14 ) could be connected with a support structure which holds theemitter units 430 in a fixed relationship relative to each other and facilitates positioning of the emitter units relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c. For example, a positioning section having a plurality of fingers, could be manually centered on the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c to locate theemitter units 430 relative to the Adam's apple. Similarly, a collar, corresponding to thecollar 306 ofFIG. 7 , could be provided on a circular or oval support which would extend around the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c to locate theemitter units 430 relative to the patient's Adam's apple. Regardless of the specific structure which is utilized to position theemitter units 430 relative to each other, this apparatus could be manually positioned relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c without being connected with a positioning apparatus having a construction similar to the construction of thepositioning apparatus 56 c. - When the
positioning apparatus 56 c is to be utilized to assist in the positioning of theguide rod 50 c relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11 c, thepositioning section 96 c is positioned in engagement with the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c. Theemitter units 430 may be suitably mounted on thepositioning section 96 c. This would locate theemitter units 430 relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c (FIG. 14 ). It should be understood that theemitter units 430 could be mounted on a support other than thepositioning section 96 c if desired. Of course, theemitter units 430 may be secured directly to the neck of the patient by a suitable adhesive, as illustrated inFIG. 14 . When this is done, a support structure interconnecting theemitter units 430 may be used to facilitate positioning of the emitter units relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c. - The
arcuate member 108 c is then positioned axially along thebody section 86 c. When thearcuate member 108 c has been moved to a desired position relative to thebody section 86 c, theconnection 110 c is secured to hold the arcuate member against axial movement along the body section. Thearcuate member 108 c is then moved relative to thebody section 86 c to position theguide section 114 c and theleading end portion 52 c of theguide rod 50 c in alignment with the entrance to the patient'smouth 11 c. Theguide rod 50 c is then moved into the patient'srespiratory system 11 c along an insertion path. - As the
guide rod 50 c is moved along the insertion path into the patient'srespiratory system 11 c, thedetector portion 426 of thesensor assembly 420 approaches theemitter units 430. As this occurs, the detector portion provides an output overleads micro processor 438. The computer or micro processor has an output, indicated schematically at 440, which can be viewed by a surgeon or other individual moving theguide rod 50 c along the insertion path into the patient'srespiratory system 11 c. - The computer output may include a display having a schematic illustration of a typical patient's respiratory system. The positions of the
emitter units 430 relative to the typical respiratory system and the position of thedetector portion 426 relative to theemitter units 430 would be indicated on the display. Thus, a display screen connected with thecomputer 438 has an illustration representative of the patient'srespiratory system 11 c. A plurality of indicators are provided on the display screen to indicate the positions of theemitter units 430 relative to the schematic illustration of the patient's trachea. An indicator is provided to indicate the position of the leading end of theguide rod 50 c relative to the schematic illustration of the patient's respiratory system. The display screen has one illustration of the patient'srespiratory system 11 c as viewed in a medial plane and another illustration of the patient's respiratory system as viewed in a frontal plane. Indicators corresponding to theemitter units 430 anddetector 426 are provided in both illustrations. - As the
leading end portion 52 c of theguide rod 50 c moves along the insertion path into the patient'srespiratory system 12 c, thedetector portion 426 of thesensor assembly 420 approaches theemitter portion 424 of the sensor assembly. As this occurs, the strength of the output from thedetector portion 426 through theleads detector portion 426 increases, the computer and the associated display indicates to an operator of theapparatus 56 c that theleading end portion 52 c of theguide rod 50 c is approaching a junction between the patient'sesophagus 26 c and the pharynx. - If the guide rod continues movement along its intended course of insertion, that is, into the patient's
larynx 30 c and not into the patient'sesophagus 26 c, the strength of the output signal provided by thedetector portion 426 will increase. However, if theleading end portion 52 c of theguide rod 50 c enters the patient'sesophagus 26 c, the strength of the output signal from thedetector portion 426 will decrease. The decreasing strength of the signal from thedetector portion 426 provides a clear indication to the operator of theapparatus 56 c that theleading end portion 52 c of theguide rod 50 c has deviated from its intended course. - As the
detector portion 426 of thesensor assembly 420 moves between the patient'svocal chords 32 c into alignment with theemitter portion 424 of thesensor assembly 420, the strength of the signal transmitted to thecomputer 438 will be maximized. As theguide rod 50 c continues to be moved into the patient'strachea 28 c along the insertion path, the strength of the signal transmitted through theleads computer 438 will decrease to indicate to the operator of theapparatus 56 c that theleading end portion 52 c of the guide rod has moved past the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c. - Although it is believed that it will be preferred to display the output of the
computer 438 in association with one or more illustrations of the patient'srespiratory system 11 c in the manner previously mentioned, the computer output information could be transmitted in a different manner if desired. For example, thecomputer 438 could have a light display system which indicates how close thedetector 426 is to theemitter units 430. Similarly, thecomputer 438 could have an audio output which indicates how close thedetector 426 is to the emitter units. Of course, the computer could have an output which is a combination of a display screen, lights and/or audio signals. - Once the
guide rod 50 c has been moved to the desired position along the patient'srespiratory system 11 c, thepositioning apparatus 56 c may be disconnected from theguide rod 50 c. A tracheal tube, corresponding totracheal tube 38 ofFIG. 2 , is then moved along theguide rod 50 c into the patient'strachea 28 c. The manner in which the tracheal tube is moved along theguide rod 50 c into the patient'strachea 28 c is the same as was previously discussed in conjunction with the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 1 and 2 . A magnet, corresponding to themagnet 260 ofFIGS. 4 and 7 , may be utilized to steer the leading end portion of theguide rod 50 c. If desired, an electromagnet which can be turned on and off may be utilized. - The tracheal tube which is utilized in association with the
guide rod 50 c ofFIG. 13 may have the same construction as thetracheal tube 38 utilized with theguide rod 50 ofFIG. 2 . Alternatively, the tracheal tube utilized with theguide rod 50 c may have a second detector portion, having the same construction as thedetector portion 426 of theguide rod 50 c. If the tracheal tube is provided with a second detector portion, theemitter portion 424 of thesensor assembly 420 is maintained in position relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c. - By providing the tracheal tube with a second detector portion, and by maintaining the
emitter portion 424 in position relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c, the output from the second detector portion may be utilized to locate the leading end portion of the tracheal tube as the tracheal tube is moved along theguide rod 50 c into the patient'srespiratory system 11 c. If this is done, leads, corresponding to theleads computer 438. The output from thecomputer 438 would indicate the position of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube relative to theemitter 424. The output from the second detector portion on the leading end portion of tracheal tube would indicate the position of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube relative to the position of the leading end portion of theguide rod 50 c. - The output from the computer may be a display having the construction previously described in conjunction with the
guide rod 50 c. Thus, a display screen connected with thecomputer 438 has an illustration representative of the patient'srespiratory system 11 c. A plurality of indicators are provided on the display screen to indicate the positions of theemitter units 430 relative to the patient's trachea. An indicator is provided to indicate the position of the leading end of the tracheal tube relative to the patient's respiratory system. The display screen has one illustration of the patient'srespiratory system 11 c as viewed in a medial plane and another illustration of the patient's respiratory system as viewed in a frontal plane. Indicators corresponding to theemitter units 430 and detector on the tracheal tube are provided in both illustrations. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 13 and 14 , theemitter units 430 are magnets which emit a magnetic field. Thedetector portion 426 is a magnetometer which responds to variations in the strength of a magnetic field. Thus, the output from thedetector portion 426 increases as the detector portion moves closer to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 c and the magnets forming theemitter units 430. Thedetector portion 436 may be Hall effect device, magnetoresistor, or a galvanometer device. Regardless of what specific type of magnetic field responsive device is utilized to form thedetector portion 426 of the sensor assembly, the output from the detector portion will vary as the distance between theleading end portion 52 c of theguide rod 50 c and the magnets in theemitter units 430 varies. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 13 and 14 , thesensor assembly 420 is the type which responds to a magnetic field. However, it is contemplated that thesensor assembly 420 could be constructed so as to respond to other types of emissions. For example, light sources could be utilized as theemitter units 430 and thedetector portion 436 may be a photo cell which responds to variations in the amount of light received. Alternatively, theemitter units 430 could be sources of radio frequency radiation and thedetector portion 426 could be constructed so as to have an output which varies as the distance between the detector portion and the sources of radio frequency radiation varies. If desired, theemitter units 430 could be ultrasonic transducers and thedetector 426 could respond to ultrasonic energy. - The
sensor assembly 420 has been illustrated inFIGS. 13 and 14 in association with thepositioning apparatus 56 c. However, it should be understood that thesensor assembly 420 could be utilized in association with thepositioning apparatus 256 ofFIGS. 4-10 or the positioning apparatus 256 a ofFIG. 11 . If this was done, the use of themagnet FIGS. 4 , 7 and 11) may be eliminated to avoid interference with magnetic fields from theemitter units 430. Of course, if the emitter units provided outputs which were not affected by the magnetic field from themagnets magnets - The
positioning apparatus 56 c andsensor assembly 420 have been illustrated in association with a tracheal intubination procedure. It is contemplated that thepositioning apparatus 56 c and/orsensor assembly 420 may be used in association with other medical procedures if desired. For example, thepositioning apparatus 56 c and/orsensor assembly 420 may be used in the performance of endoscopic, arthroscopic or fiber optic surgical procedures. Thepositioning apparatus 56 c and/orsensor assembly 420 may be used in association with surgery on joints or other portions of a patient's body. Thepositioning apparatus 56 c and/orsensor assembly 420 may be used to deliver medicants to a desired location in a patient's body - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 13 and 14 , theemitter portion 424 of thesensor assembly 420 is disposed adjacent to the outer surface of the neck of the patient while thedetector portion 426 of the sensor assembly is connected with theguide rod 50 c. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 15 and 16 , the detector portion of the sensor assembly is disposed adjacent to the outer surface of the patient's neck and the emitter portion of the sensor assembly is connected with the leading end portion of the guide rod. Since the embodiment of the invention illustratedFIGS. 15 and 16 is generally similar to the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 1 , 2, 13 and 14, similar numerals will be utilized to identify similar components, the suffix letter “d” being associated with the numerals ofFIGS. 15 and 16 to avoid confusion. - The
positioning apparatus 56 d is utilized to position aflexible guide rod 50 d relative to a patient'srespiratory system 11 d. Thepositioning apparatus 56 d includes abase section 78 d having abody section 86 d and apositioning section 96 d. Anarcuate member 108 d is connected with thebody section 86 d at aconnection 110 d. When thearcuate member 108 d has been moved to a desired position along thebase section 86 d, theconnection 110 d is actuated to hold themember 108 d against axial movement along thebody section 86 d. When theguide section 114 d has been moved into alignment with the patient'smouth 12 d, theconnection 110 d is again actuated to hold thearcuate member 108 d against movement relative to thebase section 86 d. - The
guide section 114 d cooperates with theflexible guide rod 50 d to position the guide rod during movement of the guide rod into the patient'srespiratory system 11 d along an insertion path. The general construction and mode of operation of thepositioning apparatus 56 d is the same as was previously described in conjunction with thepositioning apparatus 56 ofFIGS. 1 and 2 . - In accordance with a feature of this embodiment of the invention, a sensor assembly 420 d is provided to sense when the
guide rod 50 d has moved to a desired position relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11 d. The sensor assembly 420 d includes adetector portion 426 d (FIG. 16 ) and anemitter portion 424 d (FIG. 15 ). - The
sensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d is positioned on the outer surface of a neck of a patient (FIG. 16 ) adjacent to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 d. Theemitter portion 424 d is connected with aleading end portion 52 d of theguide rod 50 d (FIG. 15 ). Thesensor portion 426 d (FIG. 16 ) is mounted directly on the patient's neck by a suitable adhesive. However, if desired, thesensor portion 426 d could be connected with thepositioning section 96 d of thepositioning apparatus 56 d. If this is done, when thepositioning section 96 d of thepositioning apparatus 56 d is positioned in engagement with the patient's Adam'sapple 34 d, thesensor portion 426 of the sensor assembly 420 d would also positioned relative to the patient's Adam's apple. However, if desired, thesensor portion 426 d could be mounted on a support and positioned relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 d independently of thepositioning section 96 d of thepositioning apparatus 56 d. - The
sensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d includes a plurality ofsensor units 440 which are disposed in an array around the patient's Adam'sapple 34 d (FIG. 16 ). Thesensor units 440 haveleads 442 which are connected with a computer ormicro processor 444. The computer ormicro processor 444 has an output, indicated schematically in 446 inFIG. 16 , which is indicative of the position of theemitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d relative to the position of thesensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly. Theemitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d is connected with theleading end portion 52 d of theguide rod 50 d. - During use of the
positioning apparatus 56 d, theleading end portion 52 d of theflexible guide rod 50 d is aligned with themouth 12 d of the patient. Theguide rod 50 d is then moved into the patient'srespiratory system 11 d along an insertion path. As theguide rod 50 d is moved into the patient'srespiratory system 11 d, theemitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d approaches thesensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d. As this occurs, the strength of the output from thesensor units 440 increases. - The increasing strength of the output from the
sensor units 440 results in a change in theoutput 446 from thecomputer 444. Theoutput 446 from thecomputer 444 may take the form of a display which schematically indicates the position of theemitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d relative to thesensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly. Thus, a display screen for thecomputer 444 may have a schematic illustration representative of a typical patient's respiratory system. The display screen would indicate the position of thesensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d relative to the patient's respiratory system and the position of theemitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d relative to the patient's respiratory system. Since theemitter portion 424 d is connected with theleading end portion 52 d of theguide rod 50 d, the display for thecomputer 444 would indicate the position of theleading end portion 52 d of the guide rod relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 d. - Although it is believed that the use of a display screen may be preferred, the
output 446 from thecomputer 444 could take a different form if desired. For example, the computer could have an audio output. Alternatively, a display graph formed of a series of lights could provide a visual output. As theemitter portion 424 d approaches thesensor units 440, the number of illuminated lights in the series of lights would increase. When theemitter portion 424 d is aligned with the center of the array ofsensor units 440 and the patient's Adam'sapple 34 d, the entire series of lights would be illuminated. Of course, theoutput 446 from thecomputer 444 could include both audio and visual outputs. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 15 and 16 , theemitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d is a magnet which emits a magnetic field. Thesensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d has an output which varies as a function of the strength of the magnetic field at the sensor units. Therefore, as theleading end portion 52 d of theguide rod 50 d approaches the patient's Adam'sapple 34 d, the strength of the magnetic field to thesensor units 440 increases and the output transmitted to thecomputer 444 increases. - In the specific embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIG. 16 , thesensor units 440 are Hall effect devices. However, it is contemplated that other known devices which respond to variations in a magnetic field may be utilized in place of the Hall effect devices which form thesensor units 440. For example, magnetoresistors could be utilized as thesensor units 440 in place of the Hall effect devices. - Once the
guide rod 50 d has been positioned relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11d, thepositioning apparatus 56 d is disconnected from theguide rod 50 d while the guide rod is maintained stationary relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11 d. A flexible tracheal tube, corresponding to thetracheal tube 38 ofFIG. 2 , is then moved along theguide rod 50 d into the patient'srespiratory system 11 d. The manner of insertion of the tracheal tube into the patient'srespiratory system 11 d, by sliding the tracheal tube along theguide rod 50 d, is the same as was previously described in conjunction with the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 2 . - It is contemplated that the
sensor portion 426 d of the sensor assembly 420 d can be utilized in association with the tracheal tube. Thus, the tracheal tube can be provided with a second emitter portion having the same construction as theemitter portion 424 d. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 15 and 16 , a magnet, which emits a magnetic field, would be mounted on a leading end portion of the tracheal tube. - As the tracheal tube having an emitter, is moved along the
guide rod 50 d, the magnet on the leading end portion of the tracheal tube would have an effect on thesensor units 440. The effect on the magnet on thesensor units 440 increases as the leading end portion of the tracheal tube approaches the patient's Adam'sapple 34 d. It is contemplated that the tracheal tube may be inserted into the patient'strachea 28 d further than theguide rod 50 d. If this is done, the output from the sensor units 440 d diminishes in magnitude as the leading end portion of the tracheal tube is moved down the patient's trachea past the sensor units. - Although it is preferred to utilize the sensor assembly 420 d in association with the
positioning apparatus 56 d, the sensor assembly could be utilized separately from the positioning apparatus. For example, thesensor units 440 may be mounted in an array on a separate support structure. The support structure would be positioned in an engagement with the exterior of the patient's neck with the array ofsensor units 440 centered about the patient's Adam's apple, in the manner illustrated schematically inFIG. 16 . - The
guide rod 50 d would then be moved along the patient'srespiratory system 11 d without benefit of thepositioning apparatus 56 d. As theguide rod 50 d moves along the patient'srespiratory system 11 d, the strength of the magnetic field from theemitter portion 424 d of the sensor assembly 420 d detected by thesensor units 440 would increase. This would result in an increase in the output from thesensor units 440 to thecomputer 444. Theoutput 446 from thecomputer 444 would indicate to the operator moving theguide rod 50 d, the position of the guide rod along an insertion path into the patient'srespiratory system 11 d. - Once the
guide rod 50 d has been positioned in the foregoing manner relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11 d, without benefit of thepositioning apparatus 56 d, the tracheal tube would be moved along the guide rod into the patient'srespiratory system 11 d. The tracheal tube could have the same construction and move in the same manner as thetracheal tube 38 ofFIG. 2 . - Alternatively, the tracheal tube could be provided with a second emitter portion, corresponding to the
emitter portion 424 d of thesensor assembly 420. Thus, a magnet could be provided on the leading end portion of the tracheal tube. As the leading end portion of the tracheal tube moves along the insertion path into the patient'srespiratory system 11 d, the magnetic field detected by thesensor units 440 would increase due to the magnet connected with the leading end portion of the tracheal tube approaching the magnet on theleading end portion 52 d of theguide rod 50 d. - It is also contemplated that the tracheal tube could be positioned relative to the patient's
respiratory system 11 d without benefit of theguide rod 50 d. The tracheal tube would be provided with an emitter corresponding to theemitter 424 d. As tracheal tube is moved into the patient'srespiratory system 11 d without benefit of theguide rod 50 d, the output from the emitter connected to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube would be detected by thesensor units 440. The output from thesensor units 440 would indicate the position of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11 d. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 13-16 , magnets have been utilized as emitter units. The magnets which form theemitter portion 424 of thesensor assembly 420 are permanent magnets formed of a strongly magnetizable material such as cobalt or neodymium. Of course, other know magnetizable materials having saturation magnetization values, such as cerium, praseodymium and or samarium with cobalt and/or other materials could be used. Alternatively, the magnets in the emitter portion 424 (FIG. 14) and 424 d (FIG. 15 ) could be electromagnets. - The detector portion 426 (
FIG. 13) and 426 d (FIG. 16 ) of thesensor assemblies 420 and 420 d may be any known device which respond to changes in the strength and/or direction of a magnet field. For example, thedetector portions 426 include one or more Hall effect devices and/or one or more magnetoresistors. - Although the
emitter portions sensor assemblies 420 and 420 d have been described herein as emitting magnetic fields, it is contemplated that theemitter portions emitter portions 424 and/or 424 d (FIGS. 14 and 15 ) could be miniaturized radio frequency devices. Thus, the emitter portions of the sensor assemblies could be formed by radio signal transmitters having miniaturized radio circuitry which provide a radio frequency output signal. If a radio frequency transmitter is utilized in theemitter portion sensor portion - Alternatively, the
emitter portions sensor portion - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 13 and 14 , thesensor assembly 420 includes adetector portion 426 which is disposed on theleading end portion 52 c of theguide rod 50 c and responds to a magnetic field. The operator of thepositioning apparatus 56 c is informed, by a display system connected with thecomputer 438, of the position of theleading end portion 52 c of theguide rod 50 c relative to the patient'srespiratory system 11 c. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 17 and 18 , the leading end portion of the guide rod is steerable to enable the other operator to alter the course of movement of the leading end portion of the guide rod to maintain the leading end portion of the guide rod on a desired insertion path into the patient's respiratory system. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 17 and 18 is generally similar in the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 13-16 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “e” being associated with the numerals ofFIGS. 17 and 18 to avoid confusion. - The embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 17 and 18 is utilized with a positioning apparatus having the same construction as the positioning apparatus ofFIGS. 1 , 2, and 13-16. However, the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 17 and 18 could be used with thepositioning apparatus 256 and/or 256 a ofFIGS. 4-11 if desired. The guide rod 50 e ofFIGS. 17 and 18 is provided with a steering apparatus 460. The steering apparatus 460 is operable to change the course of movement of the leading end portion 52 e of the flexible guide rod 50 e as the guide rod moves along the insertion path into the patient's respiratory system. - The steering apparatus 460 applies force against body tissue in the patient's respiratory system to deflect the leading end portion 52 e of the flexible guide rod 50 e away from an undesired course of movement. For example, when the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 e is approaching a junction between the patient's esophagus 26 (
FIG. 1 ) andtrachea 28, the steering apparatus 460 (FIGS. 17 and 18 ) may be activated to deflect the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e away from the entrance to the patient's esophagus. Similarly, when the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e is approaching thelarynx 30, the steering apparatus 460 may be activated to align the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod with an opening between vocal chords in the patient's larynx. - In the illustrated embodiment of the invention, the steering apparatus 460 includes a plurality of expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 (
FIG. 18 ). Although three expandable elements 464-468 have been illustrated as being disposed in a circular array about the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e, a greater or lesser number of expandable elements could be provided in association with the leading end portion of the guide rod if desired. - The expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 are individually activatable so that one, two or all three of the expandable elements can be expanded. For example, just the expandable element 464 (
FIG. 18 ) may be expanded to apply force against the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e to move the guide rod downward (as viewed inFIG. 18 ) relative to a path of movement of the guide rod through the patient's respiratory system. Alternatively, the expandable elements 466 and 468 may be expanded at the same time to deflect the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e upward (as viewed inFIG. 18 ). It is believed that it may be desired to center the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e in a passage in the patient's respiratory system. When this is to be done, all three expandable elements 464, 466, and 468 would be expanded. - In the illustrated embodiment of the invention, the expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 are balloons or bladders which are expanded under the influence of fluid pressure, that is, under the influence of either a gas or a liquid. To enable the expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 to be individually expanded, conduits 472, 474 and 476 are each connected in fluid communication with one of the expandable elements 464, 466 or 468. For example, when the expandable element 464 is to expanded, fluid under pressure is connected through the conduit 472 to the expandable element 464. Similarly, when the expandable element 466 is to expanded, fluid under pressure is connected through the conduit 474 to the expandable element 466. Finally, when the expandable element 468 is to be expanded, fluid under pressure is connect through the conduit 476 to the expandable element 468
- After one or more of the expandable element 464-468 have been expanded to steer the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e, the expandable elements 464, 466 and/or 468 are contracted. This may be accomplished by connecting the conduits 472, 474 and/or 476 with a source of suction or low pressure. The expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 are contracted under the influence of their own natural resilience. If desired, springs could be provided in association with the expandable elements to contract the expandable elements 464-468.
- The contracted expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 are disposed in engagement with an outer side surface of the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e. If desired, recesses could be provided in the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 e to receive each of the expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 when the expandable elements are in their contracted condition.
- It is believed that it will be preferred to form the expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 of a resiliently stretchable polymeric material so that the expandable elements can be expanded, under the influence of fluid pressure, by stretching the material of the expandable elements. When the expandable elements are to be deflated, the resiliently stretched elastomeric material of the expandable elements 464-468 will tend to force fluid out of the expandable elements and cause them to return to their contracted conditions. When the retracted, the expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 are disposed in either separate recesses or a single annular recess which extends around the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 e. The contracted expandable elements do not project outward from the outer side surface of the guide rod 50 e. Alternatively, the contracted expandable elements 464-468 could be contracted, under the influence of their own natural resilience, into tight abutting engagement with the outer side surface of the guide rod 50 e.
- It is contemplated that the conduits 472, 474 and 476 and expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 may be formed in a manner similar to that disposed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/470,142 filed Jun. 6, 1995 by Peter M. Bonutti et al. and entitled Method Of Using Expandable Cannula. The disclosure of the aforementioned application Ser. No. 08/470,142 is hereby incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference thereto. Alternatively, the expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 could be formed in manners similar to that disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,833,003 and/or 5,197,971.
- Although the illustrated expandable elements 464-468 are expanded under the influence of fluid pressure, they could be expanded in a different manner if desired. For example, mechanical actuators could be provided. The mechanical actuators may be utilized to move members which are not balloons.
- In order to enable an operator of the positioning apparatus to determine the location of the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e relative to the patient's respiratory system, a sensor assembly, similar to the
sensor assembly 420 ofFIGS. 13 and 14 , is utilized in association with the steering apparatus 460. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 17 , the detector portion 426 e of the sensor assembly includes a detector 480 which responds to an output from an emitter portion of the sensor assembly. The detector 480 is enclosed by a soft dome or cap 482 which forms part of the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e. The dome or cap 482 cushions engagement of the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e with body tissue along the patient's respiratory system. In addition, the dome 482 protects the detector portion 426 e. - The detector 480 may be a Hall effect device which cooperates with emitters, which are magnets, in the manner described in conjunction with
FIGS. 13 and 14 . Alternatively, the detector 480 may respond to radio frequency radiation. If desired, the detector 480 could be constructed so as to respond to ultrasonic energy. Rather than providing a detector 480 on the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e, an emitter could be provided in the manner described in conjunction withFIGS. 15 and 16 . - The detector portion 426 e (
FIG. 17 ) is connected with a computer, similar to thecomputer 438 ofFIG. 13 , by a lead 486 (FIG. 17 ). The output from the computer indicates to an operator the position of the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e relative to the patient's respiratory system. The output of the computer will also indicate to the operator when the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e may deviate from the intended course of insertion of the guide rod into the patient's respiratory system. - When the output from the computer indicates that the leading end portion of the guide rod may not move along the intended insertion path, the operator may initiate expansion of one or more of the expandable elements 464-468. The expandable elements will apply force against the patient's body tissue and against the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod 50 e to deflect the guide rod in such a manner as to maintain the guide rod on its intended insertion path into the patient's respiratory system.
- As was previously described in conjunction with the embodiments of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 13-16 , a visual display system, illustrative of the patient's respiratory system, may be connected with the computer which receives the output from asensor assembly 420 or 420 d. By viewing an illustration depicting the location and path of movement of the leading end portion 52 e of the flexible guide rod 50 e, an operator will know when to expand one or more of the expandable elements 464, 466 and 468. - It is contemplated that the steering apparatus 460 and position sensing assembly may be used with devices for purposes other than tracheal intubination. For example, the steering apparatus 460 and position sensing assembly used with the guide rod 50 e of
FIG. 17 could be used in association with a device which is used to position medicant at a selected location in a patient's body. It is also contemplated that the steering apparatus 460 and position sensing assembly could be used in conjunction with endoscopic, arthroscopic, or fiber optic surgery. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 17 and 18 , the steering apparatus 460 is disclosed in conjunction with the guide rod 50 e which is used with a sensor assembly, corresponding with thesensor assembly 420 ofFIG. 13 , in which the detector portion is disposed on the leading end portion 52 e of the guide rod. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 19 , the steering apparatus is disposed in association with a guide rod having an emitter portion of a sensor assembly disposed on the leading end portion of the guide rod in the manner illustrated inFIGS. 15 and 16 . Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 19 is generally similar to the embodiments of the invention illustrated inFIG. 13-18 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “f” being associated with the numerals ofFIG. 19 in order to avoid confusion. - A guide rod 50 f has a leading end portion 52 f. The guide rod 50 f is used with a positioning apparatus similar to the
positioning apparatus 56 d ofFIG. 15 . The flexible guide rod 50 f (FIG. 19 ) is associated with a sensor assembly corresponding to the sensor assembly 420 d ofFIG. 15 . Thus, the guide rod 50 f has an emitter portion 424 f (FIG. 19 ) which is connected with the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod. The output from the emitter portion 424 f is detected by suitable detectors disposed adjacent to the exterior surface of the patient's neck and to the patient's Adam's apple, in the manner illustrated schematically inFIG. 16 . - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIG. 19 , the emitter portion 424 f includes a light source 490. The light source 490 is connected with source of electrical energy by alead 492. The light source 490 has been illustrated schematically inFIG. 19 as being an incandescent light source. However, it may be preferred to provide a solid state device as a light source 490. For example, one or more light emitting diodes could be disposed on the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f to function as a light source. - It is contemplated that the electrical energy conducted over the
lead 492 to the light source 490 may be varied as the light source moves along the insertion path into the patient's respiratory system. For example, if the light source is pulsed from a maximum light emission level to a minimum light emission level, detection of the location of the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f may be facilitated. - The light source 490 may be detected by suitable photo optic devices, such as photo cells or may be visually detected by the operator of the apparatus associated with the guide rod 50 f. When the light source 490 is to be detected by the operator of the positioning apparatus, that is, when the operator is to function as the detector portion of the sensor assembly, it is believed that pulsing the light source will facilitate visual detection of the light source by the operator. It should be understood that both photo electric detection apparatus and visual detection by the operator could be utilized to locate the position of the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f as the guide rod is moved into the patient's respiratory system.
- A steering apparatus 460 f (
FIG. 19 ) is connected with the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f. The steering apparatus 460 f includes a plurality of expandable elements 464 f and 466 f. Although only two expandable elements 464 f and 466 f have been illustrated schematically inFIG. 19 , it should be understood that a third expandable element, corresponding to the expandable element 468 ofFIG. 18 , is connected with the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f. The expandable elements are connected with a source of inflation fluid by conduits 472 f, 474 f and 476 f. - When one or more of the expandable elements connected with the leading end portion 52 f (
FIG. 19 ) of the guide rod 50 f are to be expanded, fluid under pressure is conducted to the expandable elements. For example, when the expandable element 464 f is to be operated from a contracted condition to an expanded condition, fluid under pressure, which may be either a gas or liquid, is conducted through the conduit 472 f to the expandable element 464 f. As the expandable element 464 f is operated from a contracted condition to an expanded condition of the influence of fluid pressure, the expandable element applies force against the adjacent body tissues in the patient's respiratory system and applies force against the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f. The force applied against the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f deflects the leading end portion 52 f of the guide rod 50 f downward (as used inFIG. 19 ) to maintain the guide rod on the intended path of insertion into the patient's respiratory system. The output from the emitter portion 424 f of the sensor assembly enables the operator to determine when it is necessary to expand one or more of the expandable elements and to determine which of the expandable elements to be expanded. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIG. 19 , the emitter on the leading end portion of the guide rod 50 f is a light source 490. However, a different type of emitter could be provided if desired. For example, the emitter could be a magnet which cooperates with detectors in the manner previously described in conjunction withFIGS. 15 and 16 . Alternatively, the emitter could be a miniaturized radio frequency transmitter. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 13 through 19 , sensor assemblies have been illustrated as being associated with a guide rod of a positioning apparatus. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 12 , fiber optics are utilized in association with a light source to enable an operator to view images of body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of aguide rod 50 b. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 20 , a light source and fiber optics are associated with a tracheal tube to enable an operator to view images of body tissue immediately ahead of a leading end portion of the tracheal tube during of insertion of the tracheal tube into a patient's respiratory system. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 20 is generally similar to the embodiments of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 1 , 2 and 12, similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “g” being associated with the numerals ofFIG. 20 to avoid confusion. - A flexible tracheal tube 38 g (
FIG. 20 ) has aleading end portion 500. Alight source 400 g is disposed on theleading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g. Thelight source 400 g is connected with a source of electrical energy byleads light source 400 g illuminates body tissue immediately ahead of theleading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIG. 20 , thelight source 400 g is mounted on the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 38 g. However, it is contemplated that the light source could be disposed at a location remote from theleading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g and illumination transmitted from the light source to the leading end portion of the tracheal tube through a fiber optic tube, corresponding to thefiber optic tube 402 ofFIG. 12 . Of course, a plurality of fiber optic tubes could be utilized if desired. - The
light source 400 g has been illustrated schematically inFIG. 20 as being an incandescent light source. However, it is contemplated that one or more solid state devices, such as light emitting diodes, could form thelight source 400 g if desired. A plurality oflight sources 400 g could be disposed in a circular array on theleading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g. - A
prismatic lens 510 is also mounted on theleading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g. Thelens 510 is enclosed by atransparent dome 512 which is connected with theleading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g. Light is transmitted from thelens 510 through afiber optic tube 408 g to the eye of a viewer or to a display unit associated with a computer. Thelens 510 is oriented so that images of body tissue immediately ahead of theleading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g are transmitted through thefiber optic tube 408 g. Although only a singlelight source 400 g andsingle lens 510 have been illustrated schematically inFIG. 20 , it should be understood that a plurality of light sources and/or a plurality of lenses may be mounted on theleading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g. - The flexible tracheal tube 38 g may be utilized in association with the
positioning apparatus 56 ofFIGS. 1 and 2 or with thepositioning apparatus 256 ofFIG. 4 . Alternatively, the tracheal tube 38 g may be utilized by itself, that is without a positioning apparatus. If the tracheal tube 38 g is utilized with a positioning apparatus similar to thepositioning apparatus guide rod 50 or theguide rod 250 as the tracheal tube is moved into a patient's respiratory system. However, the tracheal tube may be moved along a guide rod into a patient's respiratory system without utilizing a positioning apparatus, similar to thepositioning apparatus FIGS. 1 and 4 . - The tracheal tube 38 g may be moved along an insertion path into a patient's respiratory system without benefit of a guide rod. If desired, a steering apparatus, corresponding to the steering apparatus 460 and 460 f of
FIG. 17-19 , may be associated with the leading end portion of the tracheal tube 38 g. Thus, expandable elements, corresponding to the expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 ofFIG. 18 may be connected with theleading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g. The expandable elements connected with theleading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g may be connected in fluid communication with a source of fluid under pressure through conduits disposed in the side wall of the tracheal tube. Since images of body tissue immediately ahead of the leading end portion of the tracheal tube are transmitted through thefiber optic tube 408 g, an operator who is positioning the tracheal tube relative to a patient's respiratory system will be able to view images of the body tissue and, from these images, be able to determine when to activate one or more expandable elements of a steering apparatus connected with theleading end portion 500 of the tracheal tube 38 g. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIG. 20 , images of patient's body tissue are transmitted from the leading end portion of the tracheal tube for viewing by an operator who is inserting the tracheal tube into the respiratory system of a patient. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 21 , the tracheal tube is associated with a sensor assembly having the same construction as thesensor assembly 420 ofFIGS. 13 and 14 . Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 21 is generally similar to the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 13 , 14 and 20, similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “h” being associated with the numerals ofFIG. 21 to avoid confusion. - A
tracheal tube 38 h (FIG. 21 ) has aleading end portion 500 h. Adetector portion 426 h is provided on theleading end portion 500 h of thetracheal tube 38 h. Thedetector portion 426 h cooperates with an emitter portion of a sensor assembly having the same construction as the emitter portion 424 (FIG. 14 ) of thesensor assembly 420. - The
tracheal tube 38 h includes a plurality of magneticflux sensor units 440 h which respond to variations in a magnetic flux field in which the sensor units are exposed. In the illustrated embodiment of the invention, thesensor units 440 h are Hall effect devices. However, thesensor units 440 h could be other known types of devices which respond to a magnetic flux field - The
sensors 440 h are connected with a computer, similar to thecomputer 438 ofFIG. 13 , by a plurality ofleads 442 h. The computer to which theleads 442 h are connected has a display unit which displays an image of a typical respiratory system. The display indicates the position of theleading end portion 500 h of thetracheal tube 38 h relative to the patient's respiratory system - In addition, the computer display may also indicate the position of a guide rod, corresponding to the
guide rod 50 c ofFIG. 13 , relative to the patient's respiratory system. Therefore, the computer display shows the position of theleading end portion 500 h of thetracheal tube 38 h relative to theleading end portion 52 c (FIG. 13 ) of theguide rod 50 c. Although thetracheal tube 38 h may advantageously be utilized in association with a guide rod, similar to theguide rod 50 c, it is contemplated that the tracheal tube 50 h could be utilized by itself without an associated guide rod. Of course, if thetracheal tube 38 h was utilized by itself without a guide rod similar to theguide rod 50 c ofFIG. 13 , the output from the computer would indicated the position of the leading end portion 50 h of thetracheal tube 38 h relative to the patient's respiratory system and would not indicate the location of the guide rod. - It is contemplated that a steering apparatus similar to the steering apparatus 460 of
FIG. 17 may be utilized with thetracheal tube 38 h (FIG. 21 ). A plurality of expandable elements, corresponding to the expandable elements 464, 466 and 468 ofFIG. 18 , would be connected with the leading end portion 50 h of thetracheal tube 38 h. The cooperation between the Hall effect devices forming thesensor units 440 h and the magnets of an associated detector portion of a sensor assembly would enable an operator inserting thetracheal tube 38 h into a patient's respiratory system to determine when one or more of the expandable elements should be expanded to steer theleading end portion 500 h of thetracheal tube 38 h. - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIG. 19 , a light source 490 and steering apparatus 460 f is associated with the leading end portion 52 f of a guide rod 50 f. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 22 , a plurality of light sources and a steering apparatus are associated with the leading end portion of a tracheal tube. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIG. 22 is generally similar to the embodiments of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 19-21 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “j” being associated with the numerals ofFIG. 22 to avoid confusion. - A
tracheal tube 38 j has aleading end portion 500 j. A plurality oflight sources 490 j are mounted on theleading end portion 500 j of thetracheal tube 38 j. Thelight sources 490 j are energized by electrical energy connected overleads 492 j. Although thelight sources 490 j have been indicated schematically inFIG. 22 as being incandescent light sources, it is contemplated that solid state devices, such as light emitting diodes, could be utilized as the light sources if desired. - The
steering apparatus 460 j is mounted on theleading end portion 500 j of thetracheal tube 38 j. Thesteering apparatus 460 j includes a plurality ofexpandable elements expandable elements FIG. 22 , it should be understood that there are three expandable elements connected with theleading end portion 500 j of thetracheal tube 38 j. The expandable elements are disposed in an array around the end of the tracheal tube in much the same manner as illustrated schematically inFIG. 18 in association with the guide rod 50 e - The
expandable elements conduits conduits tracheal tube 38 j in the manner indicated schematically inFIG. 22 . Of course, a third conduit is provided to conduct fluid to and from a third expandable element on theend portion 500 j of thetracheal tube 38 j. It should be understood that theconduits tracheal tube 38 j if desired. - When the
steering apparatus 460 j is to be utilized to change the course of movement of theleading end portion 500 j of thetracheal tube 38 j relative to a patient's respiratory system, one or more of the expandable elements in thesteering apparatus 460 j is inflated under the influence of fluid pressure conducted through an associated conduit. For example, if theexpandable element 464 j is to be operated from a contracted condition to the expanded condition illustrated schematically inFIG. 22 , fluid pressure is connected through theconduit 472 j. As theexpandable element 464 j expands, forces are applied against tissue in the patient's respiratory system by theexpandable element 464 j. At the same time, theexpandable element 464 j is effective to apply force against theleading end portion 500 j of thetracheal tube 38 j to deflect the tracheal tube downward (as viewed inFIG. 22 - It is contemplated that the
tracheal tube 38 j may be utilized in association with a guide rod, such as the guide rod 50 f ofFIG. 19 or theguide rod 50 ofFIG. 1 . However, if desired, thetracheal tube 38 j could be inserted into a patient's respiratory system without the benefit of a guide rod. - When the
tracheal tube 38 j is to be inserted into a patient's respiratory system, either with or without a guide rod, thelight sources 490 j are energized. Energization of thelight sources 490 j results in the emission of light which can be detected by photo cells or similar devices positioned adjacent to the outside of the patient's neck. If desired, the photo cells could be eliminated and an operator could visually locate the leading end portion 50 j of thetracheal tube 38 j by viewing the illumination conducted through the patient's body tissues to the surface of the patient's neck. It is contemplated that an operator will, in all probability, locate theleading end portion 500 j of thetracheal tube 38 j by a combination of the output from photo detectors and visually viewing the patient's neck. If desired, the light sources 490 can be pulsed to provide a variation in the illumination from the light sources to facilitate visual locating of the leading end portion of thetracheal tube 38 j by an operator - When the
inflatable elements 464 j and/or 466 j are to be operated from the expanded condition illustrated inFIG. 22 to a contracted condition, theconduits conduits - As the fluid pressure in the
expandable elements leading end portion 500 j of thetracheal tube 38 j. If desired, a plurality of recesses may be provided in theleading end portion 500 j of thetracheal tube 38 j to receive theexpandable elements leading end portion 500 j of thetracheal tube 38 j, additional recesses would be provided to receive these expandable elements when they are contracted. - Various types of emitters and detectors have been illustrated in
FIGS. 20 , 21 and 22 in association with thetracheal tube 38 j. It should be understood that any of the emitters or detector systems previously described in association with a guide rod may be utilized in association with a tracheal tube. For example, a radio frequency transmitter and a receiver may be utilized as the emitter portion and the sensor portion of a sensor assembly which is utilized to detect the location of the leading end portion of a tracheal tube relative to a patient's respiratory system. - Although it is believed that it will probably be preferred to utilize a steering apparatus, similar to the
steering apparatus 460 j in association with the tracheal tube, the steering apparatus could be omitted if desired. - The general mode operation of the
positioning apparatus 56 ofFIG. 1 is illustrated schematically inFIG. 23 . As was previously explained, thepositioning apparatus 56 includes anarcuate member 108. Thearcuate member 108 has a center of curvature indicated at 600 inFIG. 23 . - The
body section 86 of thepositioning apparatus 56 has a central axis which extends through thecenter 600. Thepositioning section 96 is connected with an end of thebody section 86 which is disposed closest to thecenter 600 of curvature of thearcuate member 108. The indicia 124 (FIG. 1 ) on thebody section 86 is effective to indicate the length of thebody section 86. - The
guide rod 50 also has a central axis which extends through thecenter 600 of curvature of thearcuate section 108. The indicia 142 (FIG. 1 ) on theguide rod 50 indicates the distance from theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50 from thearcuate member 108. Theguide rod 50 andbody section 86 of thepositioning apparatus 56 are both radiuses from thecenter 600 of curvature of the arcuate member. When the indicia 142 (FIG. 1 ) indicates that the guide rod 50 (FIG. 23 ) extends from thearcuate member 108 for the same distance as thebody section 86, theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50 is aligned with thepositioning apparatus 96. Since thepositioning apparatus 96 is accurately located relative to the patient's respiratory system 11 (FIG. 1 ) by engagement with the patient's Adam'sapple 34, the position of theleading end portion 52 of the guide rod relative to the patient'slarynx 30 is known when theleading end portion 52 of theguide rod 50 is aligned withpositioning apparatus 96. - An alternative embodiment of the
positioning apparatus 56 is illustrated inFIG. 24 . Since the embodiment of the positioning apparatus illustrated inFIG. 24 is generally similar to the embodiment of thepositioning apparatus 56 illustrated inFIGS. 1 and 23 , similar numerals will be utilized to indicate similar components, the suffix letter “k” being associated with the components ofFIG. 24 to avoid confusion. - A
positioning apparatus 56 k includes abody section 86 k. Apositioning section 96 k is connected with an end portion of thebody section 86 k. Thepositioning section 96 k engages the patient's Adam's apple, in the manner previously described in conjunction with theapparatus 56 ofFIG. 1 . - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIG. 24 , amember 108 k is fixedly connected with thebody section 86 and extends at a known angle, indicated at 604 inFIG. 24 . Aguide section 114 k is disposed at an end of themember 108 k opposite from theconnection 606 with thebody section 86 k. Theguide rod section 114 k guides movement of aguide rod 50 k along a path which extends through acenter 600 k. - The
center 600 k is disposed at the intersection of a longitudinal central axis of thebody section 86 k and a longitudinal central axis of theguide rod 50 k. An angle, indicated at 610 inFIG. 24 , formed between the longitudinal central axis of thebody section 86 k and theguide rod 50 k is known. The distance from thepositioning section 96 k to theconnection 606 between thebody section 86 k andmember 108 k is known. Theangles member 108 is also known. Therefore the distance which theguide rod 50 k must extend from theguide section 114 k to have theleading end portion 52 k of the guide rod aligned with thepositioning section 96 k can readily be determined by trigonometric functions. - It should be understood that features of any one embodiment of the invention may be used with features of other embodiments of the invention. For example, the
positioning apparatus 256 ofFIGS. 4-10 could have the same construction as thepositioning apparatus 56 ofFIGS. 1-3 . Similarly, themagnet 260 ofFIG. 4 could be used with the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 1-3 . Thesensor assemblies 420 could be used with either thepositioning apparatus 56 ofFIG. 1 or thepositioning apparatus 256 ofFIGS. 4-10 . Other combinations of features of the invention will undoubtedly be utilized. - In the embodiments of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 1-24 , thepositioning apparatus 56 has apositioning section 96 which engages the patient's Adam'sapple 34. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 25 and 26 , the positioning apparatus engages a plurality of locations on the patient's neck. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 25 and 26 is generally similar to the embodiments of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 1-24 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “m” being associated with the numerals ofFIGS. 25 and 26 to avoid confusion. - A
positioning apparatus 56 m is utilized to position aguide rod 50 m corresponding to theguide rod 50 ofFIG. 1 , relative to a patient'strachea 28 m during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea. In addition, thepositioning apparatus 56 m provides an indication of the distance which theguide rod 50 m is to be moved into the patient'strachea 28 m. Thepositioning apparatus 56 m includes abase section 78 m which is connected with an arcuate upper section, corresponding to the arcuateupper section 80 ofFIG. 1 . Thebase section 78 m includes a tubularcylindrical body section 86 b. Thebase section 78 m also includes apositioning section 96 m. Thepositioning section 96 m locates thepositioning apparatus 56 m relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 m. - In accordance with a feature of the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 25 and 26 , thepositioning section 96 includes a pair ofpositioning fingers apple 34 m. Thus, thepositioning finger 622 is provided with a relatively soft resilientspherical end portion 628 which is pressed against the patient's neck 16 m at a location adjacent to the left (as viewed inFIG. 26 ) side of the patient's Adam's apple. Similarly, thepositioning finger 624 has a soft resilientspherical end portion 630 which is pressed against the patient's neck 16 m at a location adjacent to the right (as viewed inFIG. 26 ) side of the patient's Adam'sapple 34 m. The positioningfingers apple 34 m to locate thepositioning section 96 m laterally relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 m. - In the embodiment of the
positioning section 96 m illustrated inFIGS. 25 and 26 , the positioning section is provided with a straightcenter positioning finger 634 which is formed as a continuation of the tubularcylindrical body section 86 m of thepositioning apparatus 56 m. Thus, thebody section 86 m andcenter positioning finger 634 are integrally formed as one piece. Thecenter positioning finger 634 has a soft resilientspherical end portion 636 which is pressed against the patient's Adam'sapple 34 m at the center of the patient's Adam's apple. - Force may be applied against the
body section 86 m of thepositioning apparatus 56 m and transmitted to the patient's neck 16 m to straighten the trachea of the patient. Thus, a slight bend in the trachea can be minimized by the manual application of a relatively small force to thepositioning apparatus 56 m. This force is transmitted through theend portions fingers center positioning finger 634 directly to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 m. - The position of the
end portions fingers body section 86 m of thebase section 78 m of thepositioning apparatus 56 m (FIG. 25 ) can be varied. Thus, the positioningfingers slide block 640 which is axially movable along thebody section 86 m. Thebody section 86 m extends through a cylindrical central opening in theslide block 640. A set screw 642 (FIG. 25 ) having manually engagable wings or flanges can be tightened to hold thepositioning fingers body section 86 m of thepositioning apparatus 56 m. This enables the length of thecenter positioning finger 634 to be adjusted. By adjusting the length of thecenter finger 634, a relatively small amount of force can be transmitted through thecenter finger 634 directly to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 m and substantially larger forces can be transmitted through the positioningfingers apple 34 m. - It should be understood that the
positioning section 96 m ofFIGS. 25 and 26 can be utilized in any of the positioning apparatus disclosed inFIGS. 1 through 24 herein. When thepositioning section 96 m is to be associated with thepositioning apparatus 56 c ofFIG. 13 , the emitter units 430 (FIG. 14 ) could be mounted on or adjacent to theend portions FIGS. 25 and 26 ) of the positioningfingers positioning section 96 m is utilized in association with thepositioning apparatus 56 d ofFIGS. 15 and 16 , thesensor units 440 may be disposed adjacent to and connected with theend portions FIG. 25 ) of the positioningfingers - It should be understood that the
positioning apparatus 56 m (FIGS. 25 and 26 ) may be associated with guide rods having the construction of theguide rod 50 ofFIG. 1 , theguide rod 250 ofFIGS. 4 and 8 , the guide rod 50 e ofFIGS. 17 and 18 , or the guide rod 50 f ofFIG. 19 . It should also be understood that thepositioning apparatus 56 m may be associated with a tracheal tube having the construction of any one of the tracheal tubes 38 (FIG. 2 ), 238 (FIGS. 9 and 10 ), 38 g (FIG. 20 ), 38 h (FIG. 21 ), or 38 j (FIG. 22 ). - In the embodiment of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 25 and 26 , the positioningfingers body section 86 m of thepositioning apparatus 56 m by theslide block 640 while the positioningfingers 634 is integrally formed as one piece with the body section 36 m. In the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 27 and 28, the positioning fingers are movable relative to the body section of the positioning apparatus. Since the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 27 and 28 is generally similar to the embodiments of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 1-26 , similar numerals will be utilized to designate similar components, the suffix letter “r” being associated with the numerals ofFIGS. 27 and 28 to avoid confusion. - A
positioning apparatus 56 r positions a guide rod, corresponding to theguide rod 50 ofFIG. 1 , relative to a patient's trachea during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea. In addition, thepositioning apparatus 56 r provides an indication of the distance which the guide rod is to be moved into the patient's trachea. Although only a portion of thepositioning apparatus 56 r is illustrated inFIGS. 27 and 28 , it should be understood that the positioning apparatus may have the same general construction as the positioning apparatus of any one of the embodiments illustrated inFIGS. 1-19 . - The
positioning apparatus 56 r includes abase section 78 r which is connected with an arcuate upper section corresponding to the arcuateupper section 80 ofFIG. 1 . The upper section of thepositioning apparatus 56 r guides movement of a guide rod, corresponding to theguide rod 50 ofFIG. 1 , during insertion of the guide rod into the patient's trachea. - In accordance with a feature of the present invention, a
positioning section 96 r is connected with thebase section 78 r. Thepositioning section 96 r locates thepositioning apparatus 56 r relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 r (FIG. 28 ). Thepositioning section 96 r is connected with an end of abody section 86 r of thepositioning apparatus 56 r by auniversal pivot connection 652. Thepivot connection 652 allows the orientation of thebase section 78 r of thepositioning apparatus 56 r to be changed in any direction relative to thepositioning section 96 r. Thus, thebody section 86 r of thepositioning apparatus 56 r can be raised or lowered (as viewed inFIG. 27 ) or pivoted to the left or right (as viewed inFIG. 28 - The
positioning section 96 r includes a plurality ofpositioning fingers fingers spherical end portions positioning section 96 r may be located in any one of many different orientations relative to the patient's Adam'sapple 34 r, theposition section 96 r is illustrated inFIG. 28 with theend portions apple 34 r. Theend portion 636 r is disposed adjacent to the lower end portion of the patient's Adam'sapple 34 r. If desired, the orientation of thepositioning section 96 r could be rotated by 180 degrees from the orientation illustrated inFIG. 28 . If this was done, theend portion 636 r on thepositioning finger 634 r would be disposed adjacent to the upper portion of the patient's Adam'sapple 34 r. It is believed that it will probably be preferred to align thepivot connection 652 with the center of the patient's Adam'sapple 34 r. However, if desired, thepivot connection 652 could be offset from the center of the patient's Adam'sapple 34. - In the embodiments of the invention illustrated in
FIGS. 25-28 , thepositioning sections center positioning finger 634 of the embodiment of the invention illustrated inFIGS. 25 and 26 could be omitted. If this was done, thepositioning finger 622 would be positioned on one side of the patient's Adam'sapple 34 m and thepositioning finger 624 would be positioned on the laterally opposite side of the patient's Adam's apple, in the manner illustrated inFIG. 26 , without engaging the central portion of the patient's Adam's apple. Alternatively, thepositioning section - An improved method and apparatus for use in tracheal intubination or other medical procedures may include a
positioning apparatus positioning apparatus trachea apple flexible guide rod leading end portion tracheal tube - During movement of the
guide rod positioning apparatus tubular guide member 264 or atracheal tube guide rod positioning apparatus indicia positioning apparatus indicia 142, 342-350 may be provided on theguide rod - A
magnet 260 may be utilized to attract aleading end portion 252 of theguide rod 250. Themagnet 260 is disposed outside of the patient's body and may be positioned adjacent to an anterior side of the trachea. Magnetic attraction between themagnet 260 and theleading end portion 252 of the guide rod deflects the guide rod. This steers the leading end portion of theguide rod 250 into the entrance to the patient's trachea. A magnet may be used to steer a member relative to a patient's body tissue during performance of operations other than tracheal intubination - In order to locate the
guide rod tracheal tube FIGS. 12 and 20 ). Movement of theguide rod tracheal tube - It is believed that transmission of an image of body tissue adjacent to the leading end portion of the
tracheal tube positioning apparatus tracheal tube guide rod - Detectors and
emitters guide rod tracheal tube emitter 424, such as a magnet or a light source, may be connected with aleading end portion guide rod tracheal tube more detectors 426 may be provided on the outside of the patient's neck to detect the output from theemitter 424 when theguide rod tracheal tube detector 426 may be connected with the leading end portion of aguide rod tracheal tube more emitters 424 positioned relative to the outside of the patient's neck. Thedetector 426 would provide an output indicating when theguide rod tracheal tube - During movement of the
guide rod tracheal tube leading end portion leading end portion guide rod tracheal tube guide rod tracheal tube - It should be understood that any one of the features of the present invention may be used separately or in combination with other features of the invention. It's believed that various combinations of the features, other than those disclosed herein, may advantageously be utilized and will be apparent to those skilled in the art from the description contained herein. In addition, it should be understood that features of the present invention may be used for purposes other than tracheal intubination. From the above description of the invention, those skilled in the art will perceive improvements, changes and modifications. Such improvements, changes and modifications within the skill of the art are intended to be covered by the appended claims.
Claims (23)
1. A method for administering a medication to a treatment site in a body of a patient, the method comprising:
inserting the medication into the body of the patient;
applying a magnetic field to the body of the patient; and
guiding the medication within the body of the patient to the treatment site with the magnetic field.
2. The method of claim 1 wherein guiding the medication within the body of the patient includes controlling the magnetic field.
3. The method of claim 2 wherein the magnetic field is controlled by adjusting the strength of the magnetic field.
4. The method of claim 1 wherein the magnetic field emanates from a location outside of the patient's body.
5. The method of claim 4 wherein the magnetic field is provided by a magnet positioned on an exterior surface of the body of the patient.
6. The method of claim 1 wherein the magnetic field emanates from a location within the patient's body.
7. The method of claim 6 wherein a magnet generates the magnetic field and the magnet is inserted into the body of the patient through a tubular structure.
8. The method of claim 1 wherein the magnetic field is provided by a permanent magnet or an electromagnet.
9. The method of claim 1 wherein the magnetic field is provided by an electromagnet and the electromagnet is selectively energized or de-energized.
10. The method of claim 1 wherein the magnetic field is provided by an electromagnet and current flow to the electromagnet is reversed in direction to sequentially attract and repel the medication.
11. The method of claim 1 wherein interaction between magnetizable or magnetic particles and the magnetic field guide the medication within the body of the patient.
12. The method of claim 1 wherein the medication is inserted into the body of the patient at a location remote from the treatment site.
13. The method of claim 12 wherein the medication is inserted into the body of the patient through a tubular structure.
14. The method of claim 1 wherein the magnetic field is generated with multiple magnets.
15. A method for controllably guiding a medication from an initial location within a body of a patient to a desired location within the body of the patient, the method comprising:
applying a magnetic field to the body of the patient; and
moving the medication within the body of the patient from the initial location to the treatment site with the magnetic field.
16. The method of claim 15 wherein the magnetic field emanates from a location outside of the patient's body.
17. The method of claim 15 wherein the magnetic field emanates from a location within the patient's body.
18. The method of claim 17 wherein a magnet generates the magnetic field and the magnet is inserted into the body of the patient through a tubular structure.
19. The method of claim 15 wherein the magnetic field is provided by an electromagnet and the electromagnet is selectively energized or de-energized.
20. The method of claim 15 wherein the magnetic field is provided by an electromagnet and current flow to the electromagnet is reversed in direction to sequentially attract and repel the medication.
21. The method of claim 15 wherein interaction between magnetizable or magnetic particles and the magnetic field guide the medication within the body of the patient.
22. The method of claim 15 wherein the medication is inserted into the body of the patient through a tubular structure.
23. The method of claim 15 wherein the magnetic field is generated with multiple magnets.
Priority Applications (5)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US12/431,835 US20090216066A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2009-04-29 | Magnetically assisted medication delivery method |
US13/048,163 US20110224539A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2011-03-15 | Methods for positioning an ultrasonic catheter |
US14/256,629 US10065009B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2014-04-18 | Methods for positioning a medical device in a respiratory system |
US14/553,094 US10071215B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2014-11-25 | Medical device system including guide rod illumination |
US15/183,437 US20160287827A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2016-06-15 | System and method for determining position of a medical device |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US09/728,553 US6820614B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2000-12-02 | Tracheal intubination |
US10/990,870 US20050103333A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2004-11-17 | Medical device positioning system and method |
US12/431,835 US20090216066A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2009-04-29 | Magnetically assisted medication delivery method |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/990,870 Continuation US20050103333A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2004-11-17 | Medical device positioning system and method |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/048,163 Continuation US20110224539A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2011-03-15 | Methods for positioning an ultrasonic catheter |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20090216066A1 true US20090216066A1 (en) | 2009-08-27 |
Family
ID=24927312
Family Applications (8)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/728,553 Expired - Lifetime US6820614B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2000-12-02 | Tracheal intubination |
US10/990,871 Expired - Fee Related US7320319B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2004-11-17 | Medicant delivery system and method |
US10/990,870 Abandoned US20050103333A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2004-11-17 | Medical device positioning system and method |
US12/431,835 Abandoned US20090216066A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2009-04-29 | Magnetically assisted medication delivery method |
US13/048,163 Abandoned US20110224539A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2011-03-15 | Methods for positioning an ultrasonic catheter |
US14/256,629 Expired - Fee Related US10065009B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2014-04-18 | Methods for positioning a medical device in a respiratory system |
US14/553,094 Expired - Fee Related US10071215B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2014-11-25 | Medical device system including guide rod illumination |
US15/183,437 Abandoned US20160287827A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2016-06-15 | System and method for determining position of a medical device |
Family Applications Before (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/728,553 Expired - Lifetime US6820614B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2000-12-02 | Tracheal intubination |
US10/990,871 Expired - Fee Related US7320319B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2004-11-17 | Medicant delivery system and method |
US10/990,870 Abandoned US20050103333A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2004-11-17 | Medical device positioning system and method |
Family Applications After (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/048,163 Abandoned US20110224539A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2011-03-15 | Methods for positioning an ultrasonic catheter |
US14/256,629 Expired - Fee Related US10065009B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2014-04-18 | Methods for positioning a medical device in a respiratory system |
US14/553,094 Expired - Fee Related US10071215B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2014-11-25 | Medical device system including guide rod illumination |
US15/183,437 Abandoned US20160287827A1 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2016-06-15 | System and method for determining position of a medical device |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (8) | US6820614B2 (en) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20110077466A1 (en) * | 2009-09-25 | 2011-03-31 | Spectrum Health Innovations, LLC | Laryngoscope guide and related method of use |
US20110224539A1 (en) * | 2000-12-02 | 2011-09-15 | Bonutti Peter M | Methods for positioning an ultrasonic catheter |
Families Citing this family (113)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5881723A (en) | 1997-03-14 | 1999-03-16 | Nellcor Puritan Bennett Incorporated | Ventilator breath display and graphic user interface |
US7552729B2 (en) * | 2001-03-05 | 2009-06-30 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Army | Intubation device and method |
US6719765B2 (en) | 2001-12-03 | 2004-04-13 | Bonutti 2003 Trust-A | Magnetic suturing system and method |
US20040133130A1 (en) * | 2003-01-06 | 2004-07-08 | Ferry Steven J. | Magnetically navigable medical guidewire |
US8092450B2 (en) * | 2003-01-21 | 2012-01-10 | Baylis Medical Company Inc. | Magnetically guidable energy delivery apparatus and method of using same |
US8068485B2 (en) | 2003-05-01 | 2011-11-29 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Multimedia interface |
US7620062B2 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2009-11-17 | Genesis Microchips Inc. | Method of real time optimizing multimedia packet transmission rate |
US7424558B2 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2008-09-09 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Method of adaptively connecting a video source and a video display |
US7733915B2 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2010-06-08 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Minimizing buffer requirements in a digital video system |
US20040218624A1 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2004-11-04 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Packet based closed loop video display interface with periodic status checks |
US20040218599A1 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2004-11-04 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Packet based video display interface and methods of use thereof |
US7405719B2 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2008-07-29 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Using packet transfer for driving LCD panel driver electronics |
US20040221315A1 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2004-11-04 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Video interface arranged to provide pixel data independent of a link character clock |
US20040221312A1 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2004-11-04 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Techniques for reducing multimedia data packet overhead |
US7088741B2 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2006-08-08 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Using an auxilary channel for video monitor training |
US7567592B2 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2009-07-28 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Packet based video display interface enumeration method |
US8204076B2 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2012-06-19 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Compact packet based multimedia interface |
US6992987B2 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2006-01-31 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Enumeration method for the link clock rate and the pixel/audio clock rate |
US8059673B2 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2011-11-15 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Dynamic resource re-allocation in a packet based video display interface |
US7068686B2 (en) | 2003-05-01 | 2006-06-27 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Method and apparatus for efficient transmission of multimedia data packets |
US7839860B2 (en) * | 2003-05-01 | 2010-11-23 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Packet based video display interface |
US7800623B2 (en) * | 2003-09-18 | 2010-09-21 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Bypassing pixel clock generation and CRTC circuits in a graphics controller chip |
US7487273B2 (en) * | 2003-09-18 | 2009-02-03 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Data packet based stream transport scheduler wherein transport data link does not include a clock line |
US7613300B2 (en) * | 2003-09-26 | 2009-11-03 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Content-protected digital link over a single signal line |
US7634090B2 (en) * | 2003-09-26 | 2009-12-15 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Packet based high definition high-bandwidth digital content protection |
SE0501786L (en) * | 2005-08-09 | 2007-02-10 | Atos Medical Ab | Device and procedure for tracheotomy |
US8021310B2 (en) | 2006-04-21 | 2011-09-20 | Nellcor Puritan Bennett Llc | Work of breathing display for a ventilation system |
US7784461B2 (en) | 2006-09-26 | 2010-08-31 | Nellcor Puritan Bennett Llc | Three-dimensional waveform display for a breathing assistance system |
US20210121227A1 (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2021-04-29 | Baylis Medical Company Inc. | Connector system for electrosurgical device |
US11666377B2 (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2023-06-06 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Electrosurgical device |
US8641660B2 (en) | 2006-10-04 | 2014-02-04 | P Tech, Llc | Methods and devices for controlling biologic microenvironments |
US9757585B2 (en) * | 2007-06-05 | 2017-09-12 | P Tech, Llc | Magnetic joint implant |
US8166967B2 (en) * | 2007-08-15 | 2012-05-01 | Chunyuan Qiu | Systems and methods for intubation |
US20090094658A1 (en) * | 2007-10-09 | 2009-04-09 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Methods and systems for driving multiple displays |
US20090219932A1 (en) * | 2008-02-04 | 2009-09-03 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | Multi-stream data transport and methods of use |
US20090262667A1 (en) * | 2008-04-21 | 2009-10-22 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | System and method for enabling topology mapping and communication between devices in a network |
US8568362B2 (en) * | 2008-04-28 | 2013-10-29 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Surgical access device with sorbents |
US20100037899A1 (en) * | 2008-08-14 | 2010-02-18 | Shiueh-Yun Lee | Endotracheal tube fixation apparatus |
JP2012501689A (en) * | 2008-09-02 | 2012-01-26 | シンクロ メディカル イノベーションズ, インコーポレイテッド | Magnetic device for catheter guidance and method of use |
US20100183004A1 (en) * | 2009-01-16 | 2010-07-22 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | System and method for dual mode communication between devices in a network |
US8130904B2 (en) * | 2009-01-29 | 2012-03-06 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Diagnostic delivery service |
US8047714B2 (en) * | 2009-01-29 | 2011-11-01 | The Invention Science Fund I, Llc | Diagnostic delivery service |
US8548564B2 (en) * | 2009-04-03 | 2013-10-01 | Covidien Lp | Tracheal tube locating system and method |
US20100256476A1 (en) * | 2009-04-06 | 2010-10-07 | Nellcor Puritan Bennett Llc | Tracheal tube locating system and method |
US9050019B2 (en) * | 2009-05-08 | 2015-06-09 | Luiz Ferreira Maracajá Neto | Pharyngeal ultrasound guide |
US8156238B2 (en) | 2009-05-13 | 2012-04-10 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | Wireless multimedia transport method and apparatus |
US8860888B2 (en) * | 2009-05-13 | 2014-10-14 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | Method and apparatus for power saving during video blanking periods |
US8429440B2 (en) * | 2009-05-13 | 2013-04-23 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | Flat panel display driver method and system |
US8760461B2 (en) | 2009-05-13 | 2014-06-24 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | Device, system, and method for wide gamut color space support |
US8582452B2 (en) | 2009-05-18 | 2013-11-12 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | Data link configuration by a receiver in the absence of link training data |
US8468285B2 (en) * | 2009-05-18 | 2013-06-18 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | Operation of video source and sink with toggled hot plug detection |
US8370554B2 (en) * | 2009-05-18 | 2013-02-05 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | Operation of video source and sink with hot plug detection not asserted |
US8291207B2 (en) * | 2009-05-18 | 2012-10-16 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | Frequency and symbol locking using signal generated clock frequency and symbol identification |
US8473033B2 (en) * | 2009-06-17 | 2013-06-25 | Covidien Lp | Method and system for determining tracheal and location information for a tracheal tube |
US8924878B2 (en) | 2009-12-04 | 2014-12-30 | Covidien Lp | Display and access to settings on a ventilator graphical user interface |
US8335992B2 (en) | 2009-12-04 | 2012-12-18 | Nellcor Puritan Bennett Llc | Visual indication of settings changes on a ventilator graphical user interface |
US9119925B2 (en) | 2009-12-04 | 2015-09-01 | Covidien Lp | Quick initiation of respiratory support via a ventilator user interface |
US9262588B2 (en) | 2009-12-18 | 2016-02-16 | Covidien Lp | Display of respiratory data graphs on a ventilator graphical user interface |
US8499252B2 (en) | 2009-12-18 | 2013-07-30 | Covidien Lp | Display of respiratory data graphs on a ventilator graphical user interface |
US8974771B2 (en) | 2010-03-09 | 2015-03-10 | Penn-Century, Inc. | Apparatus and method for aerosol delivery to the lungs or other locations of the body |
ITRM20100187A1 (en) * | 2010-04-21 | 2011-10-22 | Domenico Andrea De | ENDOTRACHEAL TUBE WITH MAGNETIC WANDER PARTICULARLY SUITABLE FOR INTERACTION WITH A LARYNGOSCOPE PERFECTED WITH MAGNETIC ELEMENTS AND ITS RELATED LARYNGOSCOPE WITH MAGNETIC ELEMENTS |
US8894569B2 (en) | 2010-04-21 | 2014-11-25 | Chunyuan Qiu | Intubation systems and methods based on airway pattern identification |
US9795753B2 (en) | 2012-03-07 | 2017-10-24 | Chunyuan Qiu | Intubation delivery systems and methods |
US8671234B2 (en) | 2010-05-27 | 2014-03-11 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | Level shifting cable adaptor and chip system for use with dual-mode multi-media device |
US20120302825A1 (en) * | 2010-11-28 | 2012-11-29 | Cook Medical Technologies Llc | Methods of Treating Tissue within a Bodily Passage |
WO2013090619A1 (en) | 2011-12-15 | 2013-06-20 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Devices and methods for preventing tracheal aspiration |
BR112014030643A8 (en) | 2012-05-31 | 2018-05-15 | Baylis Medical Co Inc | radiofrequency drilling rig. |
US10362967B2 (en) | 2012-07-09 | 2019-07-30 | Covidien Lp | Systems and methods for missed breath detection and indication |
US11937873B2 (en) | 2013-03-12 | 2024-03-26 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Electrosurgical device having a lumen |
CA3220441A1 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2015-09-17 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Electrosurgical device having a distal aperture |
JP2015037528A (en) * | 2013-07-19 | 2015-02-26 | 株式会社東芝 | Ultrasonic medical device and ultrasonic diagnostic device |
CA3117171C (en) | 2013-08-07 | 2024-02-20 | Baylis Medical Company Inc. | Methods and devices for puncturing tissue |
US10149957B2 (en) * | 2013-10-03 | 2018-12-11 | University Of Utah Research Foundation | Tracheal intubation system including a laryngoscope |
WO2015069804A1 (en) | 2013-11-05 | 2015-05-14 | Ciel Medical, Inc. | Devices and methods for airway measurement |
CN103720501A (en) * | 2014-01-21 | 2014-04-16 | 天津市塑料研究所有限公司 | Nasal cavity hemostat, sinus cavity hemostat and hemostasis operation method |
CN104906682A (en) | 2014-01-24 | 2015-09-16 | 史蒂文·沙勒布瓦 | Articulating balloon catheter and method for using the same |
US11547823B2 (en) * | 2014-04-11 | 2023-01-10 | Nilesh R. Vasan | Bougie and method of making and using the same |
US9950129B2 (en) | 2014-10-27 | 2018-04-24 | Covidien Lp | Ventilation triggering using change-point detection |
CN113558754B (en) | 2015-09-09 | 2024-08-02 | 波士顿科学医疗设备有限公司 | Needle for gaining access to epicardium and system for accessing pericardial cavity |
CA3010700C (en) | 2016-01-07 | 2024-06-18 | Baylis Medical Company Inc. | Hybrid transseptal dilator and methods of using the same |
CN105561455B (en) * | 2016-02-01 | 2017-12-12 | 丽水市人民医院 | Trachea tube inserting forceps and pincers support |
CN105641759B (en) * | 2016-04-07 | 2017-10-13 | 常州达尔文医疗器械科技有限公司 | Magnetic intraperitoneal drainage pipe device |
US10857333B2 (en) * | 2017-11-27 | 2020-12-08 | Acclarent, Inc. | Guidewire with integral expandable dilator |
CN111601633A (en) | 2017-12-05 | 2020-08-28 | 韦斯利·罗伯特·佩德森 | Transseptal guide wire puncture system |
WO2019140332A1 (en) * | 2018-01-12 | 2019-07-18 | Runnels Sean | Devices and methods for introducing an endotracheal tube |
WO2019140313A1 (en) * | 2018-01-12 | 2019-07-18 | Runnels Sean | Devices and methods for introducing and exchanging an endotracheal tube |
JP7440501B2 (en) * | 2018-06-29 | 2024-02-28 | ルンネルズ,シーン | Devices and methods for introducing endotracheal tubes |
USD876625S1 (en) | 2018-08-07 | 2020-02-25 | Adroit Surgical, Llc | Laryngoscope |
CN112584756B (en) * | 2018-08-22 | 2024-09-13 | 巴德阿克塞斯系统股份有限公司 | System and method for infrared enhanced ultrasound visualization |
EP3845132A4 (en) * | 2018-08-29 | 2021-11-03 | FUJIFILM Corporation | Ultrasonic diagnostic device and ultrasonic diagnostic device control method |
WO2020230103A1 (en) | 2019-05-15 | 2020-11-19 | Teleflex Life Sciences Unlimited Company | Tracheostomy dilator |
US11759190B2 (en) | 2019-10-18 | 2023-09-19 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Lock for medical devices, and related systems and methods |
US11801087B2 (en) | 2019-11-13 | 2023-10-31 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Apparatus and methods for puncturing tissue |
WO2021097420A1 (en) | 2019-11-14 | 2021-05-20 | Dorothy Owens | Trachcollar safety alarm |
CN110917459A (en) * | 2019-12-11 | 2020-03-27 | 姜虹 | Trachea cannula device for patient with difficult airway |
US11724070B2 (en) | 2019-12-19 | 2023-08-15 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Methods for determining a position of a first medical device with respect to a second medical device, and related systems and medical devices |
US11931098B2 (en) | 2020-02-19 | 2024-03-19 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | System and method for carrying out a medical procedure |
US12082792B2 (en) | 2020-02-25 | 2024-09-10 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Systems and methods for creating a puncture between aorta and the left atrium |
US11986209B2 (en) | 2020-02-25 | 2024-05-21 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Methods and devices for creation of communication between aorta and left atrium |
US11819243B2 (en) | 2020-03-19 | 2023-11-21 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Medical sheath and related systems and methods |
US12011279B2 (en) | 2020-04-07 | 2024-06-18 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Electro-anatomic mapping system |
US11826075B2 (en) | 2020-04-07 | 2023-11-28 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Elongated medical assembly |
US11672934B2 (en) | 2020-05-12 | 2023-06-13 | Covidien Lp | Remote ventilator adjustment |
CN111514426B (en) * | 2020-06-02 | 2024-09-03 | 华中科技大学同济医学院附属协和医院 | Auxiliary tool and method for tracheal intubation of laboratory mice |
US11938285B2 (en) | 2020-06-17 | 2024-03-26 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Stop-movement device for elongated medical assembly |
EP4167890A4 (en) | 2020-06-17 | 2024-07-31 | Boston Scient Medical Device Limited | Electroanatomical mapping system |
US11937796B2 (en) | 2020-06-18 | 2024-03-26 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Tissue-spreader assembly |
US12042178B2 (en) | 2020-07-21 | 2024-07-23 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | System of medical devices and method for pericardial puncture |
US12005202B2 (en) | 2020-08-07 | 2024-06-11 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Catheter having tissue-engaging device |
US11980412B2 (en) | 2020-09-15 | 2024-05-14 | Boston Scientific Medical Device Limited | Elongated medical sheath |
JP2022077068A (en) * | 2020-11-11 | 2022-05-23 | キヤノンメディカルシステムズ株式会社 | Positron radiation tomographic apparatus |
EP4122416A1 (en) * | 2021-07-21 | 2023-01-25 | Technische Universität München | Electromagnetic tracking for percutaneous dilatational tracheostomy |
CN114796770B (en) * | 2022-04-24 | 2023-07-04 | 四川大学华西医院 | Artificial airway air bag for multi-point position bag wall pressure measurement |
Citations (84)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US2463149A (en) * | 1947-11-24 | 1949-03-01 | Curtis W Caine | Endotracheal intubating stylet |
US2541402A (en) * | 1948-01-13 | 1951-02-13 | Curtis W Caine | Endobronchial intubating stylet |
US2862498A (en) * | 1957-06-14 | 1958-12-02 | Don J Weekes | Endotracheal tube |
US3314431A (en) * | 1964-10-05 | 1967-04-18 | Jr Raymond M Smith | Stylet for insertion of endotracheal catheter |
US3833003A (en) * | 1972-07-05 | 1974-09-03 | A Taricco | Intravascular occluding catheter |
US3996939A (en) * | 1975-07-22 | 1976-12-14 | National Catheter Corporation | Intubation stylets |
US4063561A (en) * | 1975-08-25 | 1977-12-20 | The Signal Companies, Inc. | Direction control device for endotracheal tube |
US4173228A (en) * | 1977-05-16 | 1979-11-06 | Applied Medical Devices | Catheter locating device |
US4197855A (en) * | 1977-04-04 | 1980-04-15 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Device for measuring the location, the attitude and/or the change in location or, respectively, attitude of a rigid body in space |
US4244362A (en) * | 1978-11-29 | 1981-01-13 | Anderson Charles C | Endotracheal tube control device |
US4431005A (en) * | 1981-05-07 | 1984-02-14 | Mccormick Laboratories, Inc. | Method of and apparatus for determining very accurately the position of a device inside biological tissue |
US4444185A (en) * | 1981-08-19 | 1984-04-24 | Shugar Martin A | Fiberoptic tracheotomy method |
US4445501A (en) * | 1981-05-07 | 1984-05-01 | Mccormick Laboratories, Inc. | Circuits for determining very accurately the position of a device inside biological tissue |
US4567882A (en) * | 1982-12-06 | 1986-02-04 | Vanderbilt University | Method for locating the illuminated tip of an endotracheal tube |
US4593687A (en) * | 1983-10-31 | 1986-06-10 | Gray Leo C | Endotracheal catheter |
US4727872A (en) * | 1986-10-20 | 1988-03-01 | Pablo Hawk | Endotracheal intubation system |
US4793327A (en) * | 1986-01-21 | 1988-12-27 | Frankel Alfred R | Device for opening a patient's airway during automatic intubation of the trachea |
US4832020A (en) * | 1987-03-24 | 1989-05-23 | Augustine Scott D | Tracheal intubation guide |
US4840172A (en) * | 1986-09-04 | 1989-06-20 | Augustine Scott D | Device for positioning an endotracheal tube |
US4846153A (en) * | 1988-06-10 | 1989-07-11 | George Berci | Intubating video endoscope |
US4865586A (en) * | 1987-09-21 | 1989-09-12 | Martha Hedberg | Suction stylet for endotracheal intubation |
US4905698A (en) * | 1988-09-13 | 1990-03-06 | Pharmacia Deltec Inc. | Method and apparatus for catheter location determination |
US4913139A (en) * | 1989-02-09 | 1990-04-03 | Ballew Donald H | Method of translaryngeal retrograde tracheal intubation |
US4943770A (en) * | 1987-04-21 | 1990-07-24 | Mccormick Laboratories, Inc. | Device for accurately detecting the position of a ferromagnetic material inside biological tissue |
US4960122A (en) * | 1988-05-06 | 1990-10-02 | Irving Mizus | Endotracheal tube replacement obturator |
US4983165A (en) * | 1990-01-23 | 1991-01-08 | Loiterman David A | Guidance system for vascular catheter or the like |
US5042486A (en) * | 1989-09-29 | 1991-08-27 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Catheter locatable with non-ionizing field and method for locating same |
US5099845A (en) * | 1989-05-24 | 1992-03-31 | Micronix Pty Ltd. | Medical instrument location means |
US5127913A (en) * | 1991-04-22 | 1992-07-07 | Thomas Jr Charles B | Apparatus and method for implanting an intramedullary rod |
US5197971A (en) * | 1990-03-02 | 1993-03-30 | Bonutti Peter M | Arthroscopic retractor and method of using the same |
US5211165A (en) * | 1991-09-03 | 1993-05-18 | General Electric Company | Tracking system to follow the position and orientation of a device with radiofrequency field gradients |
US5235970A (en) * | 1990-03-26 | 1993-08-17 | Augustine Medical, Inc. | Tracheal intubation with a stylet guide |
US5257636A (en) * | 1991-04-02 | 1993-11-02 | Steven J. White | Apparatus for determining position of an endothracheal tube |
US5259371A (en) * | 1992-08-13 | 1993-11-09 | Tonrey Francis G | Endotracheal tube and method of intubation |
US5259377A (en) * | 1992-03-30 | 1993-11-09 | Stephen M. Daugherty | Endotracheal tube stylet |
US5263478A (en) * | 1991-05-09 | 1993-11-23 | Ballard Medical Products | Endotracheal tube insertion and positioning apparatus |
US5325873A (en) * | 1992-07-23 | 1994-07-05 | Abbott Laboratories | Tube placement verifier system |
US5339805A (en) * | 1989-11-08 | 1994-08-23 | Parker Jeffrey D | Blind orolaryngeal and oroesophageal guiding and aiming device |
US5353807A (en) * | 1992-12-07 | 1994-10-11 | Demarco Thomas J | Magnetically guidable intubation device |
US5386828A (en) * | 1991-12-23 | 1995-02-07 | Sims Deltec, Inc. | Guide wire apparatus with location sensing member |
US5425367A (en) * | 1991-09-04 | 1995-06-20 | Navion Biomedical Corporation | Catheter depth, position and orientation location system |
US5494035A (en) * | 1994-10-26 | 1996-02-27 | Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation | Method for detecting presence of ferromagnetic objects in a medical patient |
US5558082A (en) * | 1995-01-09 | 1996-09-24 | Spencer; Robert F. | Method of intubating a patient and introducer for use with such method |
US5560351A (en) * | 1994-10-07 | 1996-10-01 | University Of Florida | Transtracheal energy application and sensing system for intubation: method and apparatus |
US5582165A (en) * | 1988-02-28 | 1996-12-10 | Bryan; James F. | Pre-assembled sealed, sheathed catheters and related valve elements with quick disconnect means for endotracheal suctioning |
US5617857A (en) * | 1995-06-06 | 1997-04-08 | Image Guided Technologies, Inc. | Imaging system having interactive medical instruments and methods |
US5622170A (en) * | 1990-10-19 | 1997-04-22 | Image Guided Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus for determining the position and orientation of an invasive portion of a probe inside a three-dimensional body |
US5622169A (en) * | 1993-09-14 | 1997-04-22 | University Of Washington | Apparatus and method for locating a medical tube in the body of a patient |
US5638819A (en) * | 1995-08-29 | 1997-06-17 | Manwaring; Kim H. | Method and apparatus for guiding an instrument to a target |
US5642730A (en) * | 1994-06-17 | 1997-07-01 | Trudell Medical Limited | Catheter system for delivery of aerosolized medicine for use with pressurized propellant canister |
US5694929A (en) * | 1996-02-26 | 1997-12-09 | Christopher; Kent L. | Method and apparatus for ventilation/oxygenation during guided insertion of an endotracheal tube |
US5711299A (en) * | 1996-01-26 | 1998-01-27 | Manwaring; Kim H. | Surgical guidance method and system for approaching a target within a body |
US5729129A (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 1998-03-17 | Biosense, Inc. | Magnetic location system with feedback adjustment of magnetic field generator |
US5749835A (en) * | 1994-09-06 | 1998-05-12 | Sims Deltec, Inc. | Method and apparatus for location of a catheter tip |
US5762064A (en) * | 1995-01-23 | 1998-06-09 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | Medical magnetic positioning system and method for determining the position of a magnetic probe |
US5779694A (en) * | 1990-01-10 | 1998-07-14 | The University Of Virginia Alumni Patents Foundation | Magnetic stereotactic system for treatment delivery |
US5782765A (en) * | 1996-04-25 | 1998-07-21 | Medtronic, Inc. | Medical positioning system |
US5785051A (en) * | 1996-06-21 | 1998-07-28 | University Of Rochester | Signal generating endotracheal tube apparatus |
US5817057A (en) * | 1996-09-13 | 1998-10-06 | Micro Interventional Systems, Inc. | Fluid propulsion steerable catheter and method |
US5843153A (en) * | 1997-07-15 | 1998-12-01 | Sulzer Intermedics Inc. | Steerable endocardial lead using magnetostrictive material and a magnetic field |
US5906579A (en) * | 1996-08-16 | 1999-05-25 | Smith & Nephew Endoscopy, Inc. | Through-wall catheter steering and positioning |
US5913820A (en) * | 1992-08-14 | 1999-06-22 | British Telecommunications Public Limited Company | Position location system |
US5944023A (en) * | 1995-12-07 | 1999-08-31 | Sims Deltec, Inc. | Systems and methods for determining the location of an implanted device including a magnet |
US5954649A (en) * | 1997-10-20 | 1999-09-21 | Irvine Biomedical, Inc. | Catheter system having ultrasound locating capabilities |
US5996582A (en) * | 1996-10-16 | 1999-12-07 | Smiths Industries Public Limited Company | Tracheal assemblies |
US6014580A (en) * | 1997-11-12 | 2000-01-11 | Stereotaxis, Inc. | Device and method for specifying magnetic field for surgical applications |
US6041775A (en) * | 1997-10-24 | 2000-03-28 | Southco, Inc. | Intrapulmonary aerosolizer |
US6078831A (en) * | 1997-09-29 | 2000-06-20 | Scimed Life Systems, Inc. | Intravascular imaging guidewire |
US6161032A (en) * | 1998-03-30 | 2000-12-12 | Biosense, Inc. | Three-axis coil sensor |
US6173199B1 (en) * | 1998-05-05 | 2001-01-09 | Syncro Medical Innovations, Inc. | Method and apparatus for intubation of a patient |
US6188355B1 (en) * | 1997-12-12 | 2001-02-13 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Wireless six-degree-of-freedom locator |
US6226543B1 (en) * | 1998-09-24 | 2001-05-01 | Super Dimension Ltd. | System and method of recording and displaying in context of an image a location of at least one point-of-interest in a body during an intra-body medical procedure |
US6226547B1 (en) * | 1997-11-15 | 2001-05-01 | Roke Manor Research Limited | Catheter tracking system |
US6349720B1 (en) * | 1998-06-25 | 2002-02-26 | Integrated Medical Systems, Inc. | Apparatus for acoustically determining position of an endotracheal tube |
US6380732B1 (en) * | 1997-02-13 | 2002-04-30 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Six-degree of freedom tracking system having a passive transponder on the object being tracked |
US6522909B1 (en) * | 1998-08-07 | 2003-02-18 | Stereotaxis, Inc. | Method and apparatus for magnetically controlling catheters in body lumens and cavities |
US6553993B2 (en) * | 1999-09-27 | 2003-04-29 | Merlyn Associates, Inc. | Endotracheal tube with tip directional control and position preserving mechanism |
US6574498B1 (en) * | 1999-09-16 | 2003-06-03 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Linking of an intra-body tracking system to external reference coordinates |
US6580938B1 (en) * | 1997-02-25 | 2003-06-17 | Biosense, Inc. | Image-guided thoracic therapy and apparatus therefor |
US6593884B1 (en) * | 1998-08-02 | 2003-07-15 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Intrabody navigation system for medical applications |
US6615155B2 (en) * | 2000-03-09 | 2003-09-02 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Object tracking using a single sensor or a pair of sensors |
US6672308B1 (en) * | 1999-10-08 | 2004-01-06 | Jnc Medical, Llc | Endotracheal intubation control assembly |
US6702780B1 (en) * | 1999-09-08 | 2004-03-09 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Steering configuration for catheter with rigid distal device |
US6711429B1 (en) * | 1998-09-24 | 2004-03-23 | Super Dimension Ltd. | System and method for determining the location of a catheter during an intra-body medical procedure |
Family Cites Families (21)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3833033A (en) | 1969-04-17 | 1974-09-03 | Hurn Brothers Eng Ltd | Method and apparatus for working elongate components at successive longitudinal locations |
US5005573A (en) | 1990-07-20 | 1991-04-09 | Buchanan Dale C | Endotracheal tube with oximetry means |
US5375596A (en) * | 1992-09-29 | 1994-12-27 | Hdc Corporation | Method and apparatus for determining the position of catheters, tubes, placement guidewires and implantable ports within biological tissue |
US5469853A (en) * | 1992-12-11 | 1995-11-28 | Tetrad Corporation | Bendable ultrasonic probe and sheath for use therewith |
US5353787A (en) | 1993-06-10 | 1994-10-11 | Price Evelyn C | Endotracheal tube and oral airway connector |
US5437273A (en) * | 1993-07-08 | 1995-08-01 | Sage Products, Inc. | Slidable endotracheal tube holder |
US5417688A (en) | 1993-12-22 | 1995-05-23 | Elstrom; John A. | Optical distal targeting system for an intramedullary nail |
DE69531994T2 (en) | 1994-09-15 | 2004-07-22 | OEC Medical Systems, Inc., Boston | SYSTEM FOR POSITION DETECTION BY MEANS OF A REFERENCE UNIT ATTACHED TO A PATIENT'S HEAD FOR USE IN THE MEDICAL AREA |
US6246898B1 (en) * | 1995-03-28 | 2001-06-12 | Sonometrics Corporation | Method for carrying out a medical procedure using a three-dimensional tracking and imaging system |
US5707354A (en) * | 1995-04-17 | 1998-01-13 | Cardiovascular Imaging Systems, Inc. | Compliant catheter lumen and methods |
CA2246287C (en) * | 1996-02-15 | 2006-10-24 | Biosense, Inc. | Medical procedures and apparatus using intrabody probes |
AU2056597A (en) * | 1996-02-28 | 1997-09-16 | Steven T. Islava | Adjustable endotracheal tube holder |
US5879306A (en) * | 1996-06-13 | 1999-03-09 | Stryker Corporation | Infrared system for visualizing body members |
SE9603314D0 (en) * | 1996-09-12 | 1996-09-12 | Siemens Elema Ab | Method and apparatus for determining the location of a catheter within the body of a patient |
US6233477B1 (en) * | 1997-10-20 | 2001-05-15 | Irvine Biomedical, Inc. | Catheter system having controllable ultrasound locating means |
GB2331365B (en) * | 1997-11-15 | 2002-03-13 | Roke Manor Research | Catheter tracking system |
US6081741A (en) * | 1998-06-05 | 2000-06-27 | Vector Medical, Inc. | Infrared surgical site locating device and method |
US6432041B1 (en) * | 1998-09-09 | 2002-08-13 | Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. | Endoscope shape detecting apparatus wherein form detecting processing is controlled according to connection state of magnetic field generating means |
US7575550B1 (en) * | 1999-03-11 | 2009-08-18 | Biosense, Inc. | Position sensing based on ultrasound emission |
US6527761B1 (en) * | 2000-10-27 | 2003-03-04 | Pulmonx, Inc. | Methods and devices for obstructing and aspirating lung tissue segments |
US6820614B2 (en) * | 2000-12-02 | 2004-11-23 | The Bonutti 2003 Trust -A | Tracheal intubination |
-
2000
- 2000-12-02 US US09/728,553 patent/US6820614B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2004
- 2004-11-17 US US10/990,871 patent/US7320319B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2004-11-17 US US10/990,870 patent/US20050103333A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2009
- 2009-04-29 US US12/431,835 patent/US20090216066A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2011
- 2011-03-15 US US13/048,163 patent/US20110224539A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2014
- 2014-04-18 US US14/256,629 patent/US10065009B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2014-11-25 US US14/553,094 patent/US10071215B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2016
- 2016-06-15 US US15/183,437 patent/US20160287827A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (86)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US2463149A (en) * | 1947-11-24 | 1949-03-01 | Curtis W Caine | Endotracheal intubating stylet |
US2541402A (en) * | 1948-01-13 | 1951-02-13 | Curtis W Caine | Endobronchial intubating stylet |
US2862498A (en) * | 1957-06-14 | 1958-12-02 | Don J Weekes | Endotracheal tube |
US3314431A (en) * | 1964-10-05 | 1967-04-18 | Jr Raymond M Smith | Stylet for insertion of endotracheal catheter |
US3833003A (en) * | 1972-07-05 | 1974-09-03 | A Taricco | Intravascular occluding catheter |
US3996939A (en) * | 1975-07-22 | 1976-12-14 | National Catheter Corporation | Intubation stylets |
US4063561A (en) * | 1975-08-25 | 1977-12-20 | The Signal Companies, Inc. | Direction control device for endotracheal tube |
US4197855A (en) * | 1977-04-04 | 1980-04-15 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Device for measuring the location, the attitude and/or the change in location or, respectively, attitude of a rigid body in space |
US4173228A (en) * | 1977-05-16 | 1979-11-06 | Applied Medical Devices | Catheter locating device |
US4244362A (en) * | 1978-11-29 | 1981-01-13 | Anderson Charles C | Endotracheal tube control device |
US4431005A (en) * | 1981-05-07 | 1984-02-14 | Mccormick Laboratories, Inc. | Method of and apparatus for determining very accurately the position of a device inside biological tissue |
US4445501A (en) * | 1981-05-07 | 1984-05-01 | Mccormick Laboratories, Inc. | Circuits for determining very accurately the position of a device inside biological tissue |
US4444185A (en) * | 1981-08-19 | 1984-04-24 | Shugar Martin A | Fiberoptic tracheotomy method |
US4567882A (en) * | 1982-12-06 | 1986-02-04 | Vanderbilt University | Method for locating the illuminated tip of an endotracheal tube |
US4593687A (en) * | 1983-10-31 | 1986-06-10 | Gray Leo C | Endotracheal catheter |
US4793327A (en) * | 1986-01-21 | 1988-12-27 | Frankel Alfred R | Device for opening a patient's airway during automatic intubation of the trachea |
US4840172A (en) * | 1986-09-04 | 1989-06-20 | Augustine Scott D | Device for positioning an endotracheal tube |
US4727872A (en) * | 1986-10-20 | 1988-03-01 | Pablo Hawk | Endotracheal intubation system |
US4832020A (en) * | 1987-03-24 | 1989-05-23 | Augustine Scott D | Tracheal intubation guide |
US4943770A (en) * | 1987-04-21 | 1990-07-24 | Mccormick Laboratories, Inc. | Device for accurately detecting the position of a ferromagnetic material inside biological tissue |
US4865586A (en) * | 1987-09-21 | 1989-09-12 | Martha Hedberg | Suction stylet for endotracheal intubation |
US5582165A (en) * | 1988-02-28 | 1996-12-10 | Bryan; James F. | Pre-assembled sealed, sheathed catheters and related valve elements with quick disconnect means for endotracheal suctioning |
US4960122A (en) * | 1988-05-06 | 1990-10-02 | Irving Mizus | Endotracheal tube replacement obturator |
US4846153A (en) * | 1988-06-10 | 1989-07-11 | George Berci | Intubating video endoscope |
US4905698B1 (en) * | 1988-09-13 | 1991-10-01 | Pharmacia Deltec Inc | |
US4905698A (en) * | 1988-09-13 | 1990-03-06 | Pharmacia Deltec Inc. | Method and apparatus for catheter location determination |
US4913139A (en) * | 1989-02-09 | 1990-04-03 | Ballew Donald H | Method of translaryngeal retrograde tracheal intubation |
US5099845A (en) * | 1989-05-24 | 1992-03-31 | Micronix Pty Ltd. | Medical instrument location means |
US5042486A (en) * | 1989-09-29 | 1991-08-27 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Catheter locatable with non-ionizing field and method for locating same |
US5339805A (en) * | 1989-11-08 | 1994-08-23 | Parker Jeffrey D | Blind orolaryngeal and oroesophageal guiding and aiming device |
US5779694A (en) * | 1990-01-10 | 1998-07-14 | The University Of Virginia Alumni Patents Foundation | Magnetic stereotactic system for treatment delivery |
US4983165A (en) * | 1990-01-23 | 1991-01-08 | Loiterman David A | Guidance system for vascular catheter or the like |
US5197971A (en) * | 1990-03-02 | 1993-03-30 | Bonutti Peter M | Arthroscopic retractor and method of using the same |
US5235970A (en) * | 1990-03-26 | 1993-08-17 | Augustine Medical, Inc. | Tracheal intubation with a stylet guide |
US5622170A (en) * | 1990-10-19 | 1997-04-22 | Image Guided Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus for determining the position and orientation of an invasive portion of a probe inside a three-dimensional body |
US5257636A (en) * | 1991-04-02 | 1993-11-02 | Steven J. White | Apparatus for determining position of an endothracheal tube |
US5127913A (en) * | 1991-04-22 | 1992-07-07 | Thomas Jr Charles B | Apparatus and method for implanting an intramedullary rod |
US5263478A (en) * | 1991-05-09 | 1993-11-23 | Ballard Medical Products | Endotracheal tube insertion and positioning apparatus |
US5211165A (en) * | 1991-09-03 | 1993-05-18 | General Electric Company | Tracking system to follow the position and orientation of a device with radiofrequency field gradients |
US5425367A (en) * | 1991-09-04 | 1995-06-20 | Navion Biomedical Corporation | Catheter depth, position and orientation location system |
US5386828A (en) * | 1991-12-23 | 1995-02-07 | Sims Deltec, Inc. | Guide wire apparatus with location sensing member |
US5259377A (en) * | 1992-03-30 | 1993-11-09 | Stephen M. Daugherty | Endotracheal tube stylet |
US5325873A (en) * | 1992-07-23 | 1994-07-05 | Abbott Laboratories | Tube placement verifier system |
US5259371A (en) * | 1992-08-13 | 1993-11-09 | Tonrey Francis G | Endotracheal tube and method of intubation |
US5913820A (en) * | 1992-08-14 | 1999-06-22 | British Telecommunications Public Limited Company | Position location system |
US5353807A (en) * | 1992-12-07 | 1994-10-11 | Demarco Thomas J | Magnetically guidable intubation device |
US5622169A (en) * | 1993-09-14 | 1997-04-22 | University Of Washington | Apparatus and method for locating a medical tube in the body of a patient |
US5642730A (en) * | 1994-06-17 | 1997-07-01 | Trudell Medical Limited | Catheter system for delivery of aerosolized medicine for use with pressurized propellant canister |
US5749835A (en) * | 1994-09-06 | 1998-05-12 | Sims Deltec, Inc. | Method and apparatus for location of a catheter tip |
US6161537A (en) * | 1994-10-07 | 2000-12-19 | University Of Florida | Transtracheal energy application and sensing system for intubation: method and apparatus |
US5560351A (en) * | 1994-10-07 | 1996-10-01 | University Of Florida | Transtracheal energy application and sensing system for intubation: method and apparatus |
US5494035A (en) * | 1994-10-26 | 1996-02-27 | Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation | Method for detecting presence of ferromagnetic objects in a medical patient |
US5558082A (en) * | 1995-01-09 | 1996-09-24 | Spencer; Robert F. | Method of intubating a patient and introducer for use with such method |
US5762064A (en) * | 1995-01-23 | 1998-06-09 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | Medical magnetic positioning system and method for determining the position of a magnetic probe |
US5617857A (en) * | 1995-06-06 | 1997-04-08 | Image Guided Technologies, Inc. | Imaging system having interactive medical instruments and methods |
US5729129A (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 1998-03-17 | Biosense, Inc. | Magnetic location system with feedback adjustment of magnetic field generator |
US5638819A (en) * | 1995-08-29 | 1997-06-17 | Manwaring; Kim H. | Method and apparatus for guiding an instrument to a target |
US5944023A (en) * | 1995-12-07 | 1999-08-31 | Sims Deltec, Inc. | Systems and methods for determining the location of an implanted device including a magnet |
US5711299A (en) * | 1996-01-26 | 1998-01-27 | Manwaring; Kim H. | Surgical guidance method and system for approaching a target within a body |
US5694929A (en) * | 1996-02-26 | 1997-12-09 | Christopher; Kent L. | Method and apparatus for ventilation/oxygenation during guided insertion of an endotracheal tube |
US5782765A (en) * | 1996-04-25 | 1998-07-21 | Medtronic, Inc. | Medical positioning system |
US5785051A (en) * | 1996-06-21 | 1998-07-28 | University Of Rochester | Signal generating endotracheal tube apparatus |
US5906579A (en) * | 1996-08-16 | 1999-05-25 | Smith & Nephew Endoscopy, Inc. | Through-wall catheter steering and positioning |
US5817057A (en) * | 1996-09-13 | 1998-10-06 | Micro Interventional Systems, Inc. | Fluid propulsion steerable catheter and method |
US5996582A (en) * | 1996-10-16 | 1999-12-07 | Smiths Industries Public Limited Company | Tracheal assemblies |
US6380732B1 (en) * | 1997-02-13 | 2002-04-30 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Six-degree of freedom tracking system having a passive transponder on the object being tracked |
US6580938B1 (en) * | 1997-02-25 | 2003-06-17 | Biosense, Inc. | Image-guided thoracic therapy and apparatus therefor |
US5843153A (en) * | 1997-07-15 | 1998-12-01 | Sulzer Intermedics Inc. | Steerable endocardial lead using magnetostrictive material and a magnetic field |
US6078831A (en) * | 1997-09-29 | 2000-06-20 | Scimed Life Systems, Inc. | Intravascular imaging guidewire |
US5954649A (en) * | 1997-10-20 | 1999-09-21 | Irvine Biomedical, Inc. | Catheter system having ultrasound locating capabilities |
US6041775A (en) * | 1997-10-24 | 2000-03-28 | Southco, Inc. | Intrapulmonary aerosolizer |
US6014580A (en) * | 1997-11-12 | 2000-01-11 | Stereotaxis, Inc. | Device and method for specifying magnetic field for surgical applications |
US6226547B1 (en) * | 1997-11-15 | 2001-05-01 | Roke Manor Research Limited | Catheter tracking system |
US6188355B1 (en) * | 1997-12-12 | 2001-02-13 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Wireless six-degree-of-freedom locator |
US6161032A (en) * | 1998-03-30 | 2000-12-12 | Biosense, Inc. | Three-axis coil sensor |
US6173199B1 (en) * | 1998-05-05 | 2001-01-09 | Syncro Medical Innovations, Inc. | Method and apparatus for intubation of a patient |
US6349720B1 (en) * | 1998-06-25 | 2002-02-26 | Integrated Medical Systems, Inc. | Apparatus for acoustically determining position of an endotracheal tube |
US6593884B1 (en) * | 1998-08-02 | 2003-07-15 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Intrabody navigation system for medical applications |
US6522909B1 (en) * | 1998-08-07 | 2003-02-18 | Stereotaxis, Inc. | Method and apparatus for magnetically controlling catheters in body lumens and cavities |
US6226543B1 (en) * | 1998-09-24 | 2001-05-01 | Super Dimension Ltd. | System and method of recording and displaying in context of an image a location of at least one point-of-interest in a body during an intra-body medical procedure |
US6711429B1 (en) * | 1998-09-24 | 2004-03-23 | Super Dimension Ltd. | System and method for determining the location of a catheter during an intra-body medical procedure |
US6702780B1 (en) * | 1999-09-08 | 2004-03-09 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Steering configuration for catheter with rigid distal device |
US6574498B1 (en) * | 1999-09-16 | 2003-06-03 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Linking of an intra-body tracking system to external reference coordinates |
US6553993B2 (en) * | 1999-09-27 | 2003-04-29 | Merlyn Associates, Inc. | Endotracheal tube with tip directional control and position preserving mechanism |
US6672308B1 (en) * | 1999-10-08 | 2004-01-06 | Jnc Medical, Llc | Endotracheal intubation control assembly |
US6615155B2 (en) * | 2000-03-09 | 2003-09-02 | Super Dimension Ltd. | Object tracking using a single sensor or a pair of sensors |
Cited By (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20110224539A1 (en) * | 2000-12-02 | 2011-09-15 | Bonutti Peter M | Methods for positioning an ultrasonic catheter |
US10065009B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2018-09-04 | P Tech, Llc | Methods for positioning a medical device in a respiratory system |
US10071215B2 (en) | 2000-12-02 | 2018-09-11 | P Tech, Llc | Medical device system including guide rod illumination |
US20110077466A1 (en) * | 2009-09-25 | 2011-03-31 | Spectrum Health Innovations, LLC | Laryngoscope guide and related method of use |
US20110201890A1 (en) * | 2009-09-25 | 2011-08-18 | Spectrum Health Innovations, LLC | Laryngoscope guide and related method of use |
US8366612B2 (en) | 2009-09-25 | 2013-02-05 | Spectrum Health Innovations, LLC | Laryngoscope guide and related method of use |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US20050103333A1 (en) | 2005-05-19 |
US10071215B2 (en) | 2018-09-11 |
US20140228679A1 (en) | 2014-08-14 |
US20150080763A1 (en) | 2015-03-19 |
US6820614B2 (en) | 2004-11-23 |
US10065009B2 (en) | 2018-09-04 |
US20110224539A1 (en) | 2011-09-15 |
US7320319B2 (en) | 2008-01-22 |
US20160287827A1 (en) | 2016-10-06 |
US20050103334A1 (en) | 2005-05-19 |
US20020066450A1 (en) | 2002-06-06 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US10071215B2 (en) | Medical device system including guide rod illumination | |
EP0915720B1 (en) | Medical tube for insertion and detection within the body of a patient | |
US6173199B1 (en) | Method and apparatus for intubation of a patient | |
US7543586B2 (en) | System and method for transcutaneous monitoring of endotracheal tube placement | |
US5431640A (en) | Method and apparatus for duodenal intubation of a patient | |
US20090177032A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for magnetically controlling endoscopes in body lumens and cavities | |
US20100268030A1 (en) | Self-Steering Endoscopic Device | |
JP7421503B2 (en) | Systems, devices and methods for performing percutaneous tracheostomy | |
WO2006031765A2 (en) | Fluoroscopy-free guidewire systems and methods | |
JP2022542250A (en) | Medical device location notification system | |
EP2491853B1 (en) | Device comprising a set of magnetic elements, particularly suitable as a support to the procedure of patient's tracheal intubation | |
CA2331129C (en) | Method and apparatus for intubation of a patient | |
CA2160512C (en) | Method and apparatus for duodenal intubation of a patient | |
EP4460282A2 (en) | Systems, apparatus, and methods for placing and/or confirming a location of a nasogastric or an orogastric tube | |
CN1225026A (en) | Medical tube for insertion and detection within the body of a patient |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: P TECH, LLC., ILLINOIS Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:MARCTEC, LLC;REEL/FRAME:022859/0060 Effective date: 20090505 Owner name: P TECH, LLC.,ILLINOIS Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:MARCTEC, LLC;REEL/FRAME:022859/0060 Effective date: 20090505 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |